MD Rafi Biochemistry

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 1383

CHAPTER 1

Section I
Prelude – Molecular and
Functional Organisation of
Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 1

Chapter 1

Learning Biochemistry

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 1

What is Biochemistry?

Anatomy is the study of structure, Physiology is the


study of function. Biochemistry integrates both these
aspects—it describes the structure and function of living
things in molecular terms.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 1

Energy in Living Organisms

Every organism needs energy for its survival.

Energy flow in the environment


Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 1

Essential Elements in the Body

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 1

Polar and Non- polar Molecules

• Water

• Hydrophilic, hydrophobic and amphipathic


molecules

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 1

Major Biomolecules in the Body

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Section I
Prelude

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 2

Chapter 2

The Cell and Biological


Membranes:
Structure and Function

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Structure of a Human Cell

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Composition of Membranes

Mem branes are made of a double layer of lipid


molecules containing proteins which are embedded in
them.

Lipids

The m ajor mem brane lipids are phospholipids. These
are amphipathic m olecules containing both hydrophilic
or polar (water soluble) and hydrophobic or non- polar
(water insoluble) groups.

The cell mem brane also contains equal amounts of
cholesterol.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Proteins


Proteins in m embranes occur in two different ways.
Some proteins are located in the interior of the
m embrane and are called integral m embrane
proteins.

Others are located in the outer surface of the
m embranes and are known as peripheral membrane
proteins.

Transm embrane proteins serve as:
a) Channels b) Carriers
c) Pumps d) Receptors

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Carbohydrates

The ex tracellular surface of the plasm a m embrane


contains small am ounts of carbohydrate structures
known as glycocalyx.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Fluid Mosaic Structure

Mem branes are organised into a structure known as


the fluid mosaic model. It is called so because
m embrane proteins float in a sea of lipids. This
m odel of the cell m embrane was proposed by Singer
and Nicholson in 1972.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2
Fluid- Mosaic Model of
Membrane Structure

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Membrane Function

Transport Across Biological Membranes

Passive Transport
Here, substances move across the cell m embrane
without any energy ex penditure by the cell. It includes
diffusion and osm osis.

1 . Diffusion
Simple Diffusion
Facilitated Diffusion

2 . Osmosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

Active Transport


When substances are transported against their
chemical and electrical gradient requiring energy,
the process is called active transport. The main
types are
1. Primary active transport
2. Secondary active transport
3. Carrier transport
4. Vesicular transport

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

1 . Primary Active Transport


i) Sodium–potassium (Na+ –K+ ) pum p
ii) Calcium (Ca2+ ) pump
iii) Potassium –hydrogen (K+ –H+ ) pump

2 . Secondary Active Transport

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

3 . Carrier Type Transport



Uniporters

Symporters

Antiporters

Carrier type processes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 2

4 . Vesicular Transport or Transcytosis


Many substances are transported across the cell
mem brane by endocytosis and ex ocytosis.
i) Endocytosis: pinocytosis, phagocytosis

Sequence of events in endocytosis


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 2

ii) Exocytosis

Sequence of events in ex ocytosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 3

Chapter 3
Carbohydrates

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Carbohydrates


Carbohydrates are aldehyde or ketone compounds
with multiple hydroxyl groups.

Carbohydrates can be defined as aldehyde or ketone
derivatives of polyhydric alcohols. Most
carbohydrates taste sweet and hence they are
popularly known as sugars.

They are the chief source of energy for all
organisms including humans.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Classification and Nomenclature

Carbohydrates are classified into three major classes based


on the number of sugar units.

1. Monosaccharides
2. Oligosaccharides
3. Polysaccharides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Monosaccharides

They are categorised into two groups based on the


functional group they possess.

Aldoses: Monosaccharides with an aldehyde group

are known as aldoses. For ex am ple, ribose (5C), glucose


(6C).
Ketoses: Monosaccharides having a keto group

are called ketoses. For ex am ple, fructose (6C).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Classification of Monosaccharides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

D and L Isomers

The spatial arrangement of –H and –OH groups on the


penultimate carbon atom in a m onosaccharide (C2 for
glyceraldehyde, C5 for glucose) determ ines whether it
is a D- isomer or its m irror im age L- isomer.

If the –OH group is on the right side, the sugar


belongs to the D- series, and if it is on the left side it
belongs to the L- series.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

D- and L- Isomerism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3


A carbon atom which is attached to four different
groups is known as an 'asymmetric' or 'chiral' carbon.

Optical Isomerism

Optical isomerism is ex hibited by those compounds
which possess asymmetric carbon(s).

Optical isomers are capable of rotating the plane of
polarised light either to the right or to the left.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3


The optical isomer which rotates the plane of
polarised light to the right (clockwise) is said to
be dextrorotatory [represented by ‘d’ or (+ )] and
the substance which rotates the plane of
polarised light to the same ex tent but to the left
(counter clockwise) is termed as levorotatory
[represented by ‘ l’ or (–)].


A solution having equal concentrations of ‘d ’ and ‘l ’
forms, known as racemic mixture, cannot rotate the
plane of polarised light and hence shows zero
optical rotation.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

EPIMERS


Monosaccharides that differ only in their
configuration around one carbon atom (other
than anom eric) are known as epimers of one
another.


Thus, D- glucose and D- mannose are epimers
with respect to C2 and D- glucose and D-
galactose are epimers with regard to C4 , that is,
they differ from each other in the arrangement of
–OH group around that particular carbon atom.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
Epimers
Epimers (glucose and mannose are C2 epimers, whereas glucose and
galactose are C4 epimers).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
Anomers


The pair of stereoisom ers that differ in
configuration around the carbonyl carbon are
called anomers.
The hemiacetal / hemiketal or carbonyl carbon is
called anomeric carbon.
In case of - anomer, the - OH group of the anomeric
carbon is on the opposite side of the terminal
primary alcohol group (C6 ) of the sugar ring.

If both groups are on the same side, it is a


- anomer.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
α and β Anomers of Glucose
(Fischer Projections)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
 &  Anomers
Pyranose and furanose forms of glucose (Haworth projections)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
 &  Anomers
Pyranose and furanose forms of fructose (Haworth projections)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Mutarotation

Mutarotation is defined as the change in optical rotation


representing interconversion of  and  forms of glucose
to an equilibrium mixture.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
Properties and Reactions of
Monosaccharides

Formation of furfurals from monosaccharides upon dehydration


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 3

Tautomerisation and Enediol formation

Formation of a common enediol from glucose, fructose and mannose. ‘R’ represents
t he common structure of all the three sugars C3 – C6 .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Osazone Formation


Only the first two carbons are involved in osazone
form ation.
The sugars which differ in configuration around the
first two carbons give identical osazones, since the
difference is masked by binding with phenyl
hydrazine.
This is the reason why glucose, fructose and mannose
give similar needle- shaped osazones.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


Differently shaped crystals (osazones) CHAPTER 3

from different carbohydrates


Glucosazone and fructosazone – long needle-
shaped or broom stick- shaped crystals.


Maltosazone – Yellow coloured ‘petals of sun
flower’- shaped crystals.


Lactosazone – ‘Hedgehog- shaped’ or powder- puff-
shaped crystals.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Disaccharides

As the name im plies, disaccharides are


carbohydrates composed of two monosaccharides
linked together through a glycosidic linkage. They
are of two types.

1 . Reducing disaccharides: They possess a free


aldehyde or keto group, e.g., maltose, lactose.

2 . Non- reducing disaccharides: They do not have


a free aldehyde or keto group,
e.g., sucrose.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Maltose

Maltose is com posed of two - D–glucose units held


together by  (1–4)- glycosidic linkage.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Lactose

Lactose is popularly known as milk sugar as it is


present in milk. Lactose is composed of - D-
galactose linked to - D- glucose through a - (1, 4)-
glycosidic bond.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Sucrose


Sucrose is mostly present in sugarcane and fruits.
Hence it is also known as cane sugar. Sucrose is
synthesised by plants through photosynthesis.


Sucrose is composed of glucose and fructose linked
together through glycosidic linkage (1 –2 ). The
aldehyde group of glucose and the keto group of
fructose are engaged in bond formation leaving no
free functional group thus making sucrose
essentially non- reducing.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Formation of sucrose

Formation of sucrose [ α - D- Glucopyranosyl- (1- 2)- β - D- fructofuranose]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
Polysaccharides

Hundreds of monosaccharides are linked together


through glycosidic linkages to form polysaccharides.

Polysaccharides are of two types:


1 . Homopolysaccharides
They are made up of a single variety of
m onosaccharides. For ex am ple, starch is a polym er
of glucose.

2 . Heteropolysaccharides
They are composed of different types of
monosaccharides or their derivatives, e.g.,
glycosaminoglycans.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 3

Starch


Starch is the high energy nutrient synthesised from
carbon diox ide and water by photosynthesis in
plants.

It is the chief carbohydrate fuel source for higher
animals, including humans. The dietary sources of
starch include cereals, tubers, roots, legumes and
vegetables.


Starch is composed of two com ponents:
Amylose and Amylopectin.


Starch is digested by pancreatic amylase in the
intestine.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Structure of Starch

Cont inues. . .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


. . . cont inued CHAPTER 3

Structure of Starch

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Glycogen

Glycogen is the storage form of carbohydrates in


animals, including humans, and hence is known as
animal starch. It is stored in muscle and in the liver.

Structure: Glycogen is composed of glucose units


linked by - (1–4) and - (1–6) glycosidic bonds. It is
structurally sim ilar to amylopectin ex cept in that
glycogen is m ore branched and well organised into a
num ber of concentric layers (about twelve). Hence,
glycogen is m ore com pact than am ylopectin (starch).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Structure of glycogen

Glucose residues taking part in α - 1- 6- glycosidic linkages are shown in pink colour.
Glycogen is the instant storage form of energy in animals, including humans.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 3
Glycogenin in the gylcogen structure

Glucose residues taking


part in α-1-6-glycosidic
linkages are shown in
orange colour. The green
ball represents glycogenin,
a protein that acts as
glycogen primer.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Cellulose


Cellulose is the most abundant carbohydrate in
nature. To be m ore precise, it is the m ost
abundant organic substance on earth. Cellulose
m akes up most of the plant framework. It is absent
in animals.


Cellulose is the unbranched, linear polymer
com posed of - D- glucose units linked through -
(1–4)- glycosidic bonds.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

Heteropolysaccharides

Glycosaminoglycans

Glycosamino glyc ans (GAGs), also known as


mucopolysaccharides, are m ade up of repeating units
of disaccharides containing am ino sugars (glucosamine
or galactosam ine) and uronic acids (glucuronic or
iduronic acids). Am ino sugars are further acetylated and
sulphated.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3

The m ajor GAGs include:

1. Hyaluronic acid
2. Chondroitin sulphates
3. Keratan sulphates
4. Heparin and heparan sulphate
5. Dermatan sulphate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 3
Structures of Glycosaminoglycans

Hyaluronic acid

Chondroitin 4 - sulphate

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


…Continued) CHAPTER 3

Keratan sulphate

Heparin

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


…Continued) CHAPTER 3

Dermatan sulphate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 4

Chapter 4

Lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Lipids


Lipids can be defined as heterogeneous
substances grouped together under one class
based on their common property, of being
insoluble in water and soluble in organic solvents
(ether, benzene, chloroform ).


They are predom inantly composed of carbon and
hydrogen atoms. These atoms are linked together
through neutral covalent bonds making lipids
essentially non- polar.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

FUNCTIONS OF LIPIDS

1. Lipids are the structural components of biological


membranes (phospholipids and cholesterol) and
are responsible for the selective permeability of the
m embranes.

2. They are the storage form of energy. Energy is


stored in the form of lipids (triacylgycerol) in
adipose tissue.

3. They act as electrical insulators (cholesterol and


glycolipids) helping in the propagation of nerve
impulse.
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

…Continued)

4. They act as thermal insulators (subcutaneous fat)


providing insulation against the changes in
ex ternal tem perature.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Classification of Lipids

Lipids are classified based on 'Bloor's classification‘


(with a few modifications) into four groups.
1 . Simple Lipids
They are fatty acid esters of alcohols
(Fatty acid + alcohol). They are of
two types.
a) Fats and oils
b) Waxes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

2 . Compound (Complex) Lipids



They are esters of fatty acids with alcohols having
additional groups like carbohydrates, proteins,
phosphoric acid

They are further classified into various sub- groups
based on the type of additional group present.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

a) Phospholipids
i) Glycerophospholipids
ii) Sphingophospholipids
b) Glycolipids
c) Lipoproteins
3 . Derived Lipids
4 . Miscellaneous Lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Fatty Acids


Fatty acids are components of the majority of lipids.
They are carbox ylic acids with a hydrocarbon side
chain.

The hydrocarbon chain accounts for the non- polar
nature of fatty acids.

Free and esterified fatty acids

Length of hydrocarbon chain

Even- and odd- number carbon fatty acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Saturated and Unsaturated Fatty Acids


Fatty acids which possess double bonds in their
structure are called 'Unsaturated fatty acids' (UFA)
and fatty acids with no double bonds are 'Saturated
fatty acids' (SFA).

Unsaturated fatty acids are further classified into
two subgroups based on the num ber of double
bonds.

1. Monounsaturated fatty acids (MUFA) are


fatty acids with single double bond.
2. Polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) are fatty
acids with two or m ore double bonds.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Unsaturated Fatty Acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Omega () Classification o f Fatty Acids

In this type of classification, the positions of the


double bonds are counted from the omega carbon end.
According to - classification, the unsaturated fatty
acids are broadly divided into three groups:

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Properties of Fatty Acids

Properties of fatty acids depend on chain length and


degree of unsaturation.

Solubility

Melting point

Salt form ation

Ester Form ation

Hydrogenation

Halogenation

Soaps and detergents

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Essential Fatty Acids



The fatty acids that are required by hum ans, but
are not synthesised in the body and hence need to
be supplied in the diet are known as essential
fatty acids (EFA).
1. Linoleic acid (18: 2; 9, 12)
2. Linolenic acid (18: 3; 9, 12, 15)

Arachidonic acid (20: 4; 5, 8, 11, 14) is considered
semiessential since it can be synthesised from
linoleic acid (note that both belong to - 6 series).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4


Only linoleic acid and linolenic acid are essential
because hum ans lack the enzym es that can
introduce double bonds beyond carbon no. 9.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Dietary Sources of Fatty Acids

Vegetable oils are the richest source of fatty


acids.

Oils rich in SFA: Palm oil, coconut oil, ghee.

Oils rich in MUFA: Groundnut oil, gingily oil,
m ustard oil, sesam e oil.

Oils rich in PUFA: Sunflower oil, cotton seed oil,
safflower oil, rice bran oil, soyabean oil, linseed oil,
corn oil.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Eicosanoids


Eicosanoids are a group of biologically active m olecules
synthesised from eicosaenoic acids (C20 PUFA).

Eicosanoids are a group of five types of molecules.
1. Prostaglandins (PG)
2. Prostacyclins (PI)
3. Thrombax anes (TX)
4. Leukotrienes (LT)
5. Lipox ins (LX)

Most eicosanoids are synthesised from arachidonate.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Biological Role and Therapeutic Applications
of Eicosanoids

Eicosanoids act as local hormones.

1 . Inflammation
Eicosanoids are the natural mediators of
inflammation. This is the basis of the use of
corticosteroids and various non- steroidal
antiinflammatory drugs (NSAID) (which inhibit
the eicosanoid synthesis) in the treatment of
various inflammatory disorders (e.g., rheum atoid
arthritis).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

2 . Regulation of Blood Pressure


Prostaglandins act as vasodilators. Hence, they
are used in the treatm ent of hypertension.

3 . Effects on Platelet Aggregation


Thrombax anes cause platelet aggregation.
Prostacyclins inhibit platelet aggregation.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

4 . Effects on Reproduction
Prostaglandins are used in medical termination of
pregnancy (MTP).

5 . Effects on the Gastrointestinal System


PGs increase intestinal motility and inhibit gastric
acid secretion. They are used in the treatm ent of
gastric ulcers.

6 . Effects on the Respiratory System


PGEs are used in the treatm ent of bronchial asthma.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Triacylglycerols

Energy is stored as lipid droplets in adipose cells.


The storage lipids are chem ically triacylglycerols.
They are insoluble in water and because of their
non- polar character.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Properties and Reactions

Properties and reactions of tiracyl glycerols in relation


to nutritional value.

Saponification number
Saponification num ber is defined as the mg of KOH
required to saponify 1 g of fat or oil completely.
Saponification num ber is a m easure of the average
m olecular weight and chain length of the fatty acids
present.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Iodine Number
It is defined as the num ber of gram s of iodine absorbed
by 100 g of fat or oil. Iodine num ber is used to assess
the degree of unsaturation of fat.

Reichert–Meissl Number (RM Number)


RM num ber is defined as the amount of 0.1 N KOH
required to neutralise the volatile fatty acids distilled
from 5 g of fat. It is employed to assess the purity of
fats having more volatile fatty acids.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Phospholipids


They are the structural components of biological
membranes and are responsible for the selective
perm eability of the m embrane.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

General structure of
phospholipids


Phospholipids are divided into two classes based on
the type of alcohol present.
I. Glycerophospholipids: They contain alcohol glycerol
(C3 )
II. Sphingophospholipids: They contain alcohol
sphingosine (C18 )

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Cephalin

It is a phosphatidic acid with ethanolam ine as the


nitrogenous base. It is a component of mem branes
along with other phospholipids.
It plays a role in blood coagulation.

Cephalin (Phosphatidyl
ethanolamine)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Lecithin


It is the phosphatidic acid with choline as the
base.

Lecithin (phosphatidyl choline)

• Lecithin is the predominant


glycerophospholipid in cell membranes.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 4
Dipalmitoyl Lecithin


Lung alveoli are coated with a surfactant which is
predom inantly made up of dipalmitoyl lecithin.


Prem ature babies without sufficient
surfactant lining the alveolar walls can have
respiratory difficulties. This results in alveolar
collapse causing respiratory distress syndrome.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Phosphatidyl Inositol

Phosphatidyl inositol

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Cardiolipin

Cardiolipin [diphosphatidyl glycerol]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Ether Lipids

Plasmalogens

Plasm alogens are predominantly phophatidal
ethanolamines:

The brain and m uscle tissue are rich in
plasm alogens.

Plasmalogen

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Sphingomyelin

The num bers in circles represent the


num ber of carbon atoms in alcohol- sphingosine.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
L/ S Ratio


Lecithin- Sphingom yelin ratio (L/ S ratio) in am niotic
fluid is an indicator frequently used to evaluate fetal
lung m aturity.

Prior to 34 weeks of gestation, the concentrations of


lecithin and sphingomyelin in am niotic fluid are
alm ost equal. Later, the concentration of lecithin
rises m arkedly and the L/ S ratio becom es 5 at term.

In preterm infants, the L/ S ratio is 1 or < 1 ,


resulting in respiratory distress.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Glycolipids


Glycolipids are high in nervous tissues


Types of glycolipids:
1. Cerebrosides
2. Globosides
3. Gangliosides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Structure Of Galactosyl Ceramide and
Sulphatide

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4
Cholesterol

Cholesterol is a sterol that is ex clusive to animals.

Structure of cholesterol

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Functions of Cholesterol

1. Cholesterol is an integral component of cell


membranes and hence influences m embrane
permeability.

2. A number of biologically important substances are


synthesised from cholesterol (e.g. vitamin D, bile
acids, mineralocorticoids, glucocorticoids and
sex hormones).

3. Cholesterol acts as an electrical insulator and


helps in the propagation of nerve impulses.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


General structures of various lipids (non- CHAPTER 4

polar and amphipathic

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 4

Examples of Lipid Bilayers

Amphipathic lipids such as


phospholipids and cholesterol are
organised into bilayers in biological
membranes. Hydrophilic groups
are oriented towards the watery
phase (both ECF and ICF), while
hydrophobic groups are oriented
towards the oily phase (central
portion of membranes).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER 5

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
,, marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 5

Chapter 5
Amino Acids and Proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Proteins


Proteins are the building material for body
structure.


Proteins are com posed of carbon, ox ygen,
hydrogen, nitrogen and sm all am ounts of other
elements, notably sulphur.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5


Proteins play the role of ‘ brick and mortar’ of the
body.


Proteins perform a number of roles including
biocatalysis, defence, hormonal function, transport,
storage and muscle contraction.


Proteins are polymers of amino acids


Standard amino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Amino Acids

Am ino acids are the structural units (monomers) of
proteins.

An amino acid is made up of two functional groups—
amino (–NH2 ), carbox yl (–COOH). They also contain a
hydrogen atom and a side chain (R) linked to the carbon
atom.

Am ino acids differ from each other in their side chains.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Classification of Amino Acids

I. Amino acids with aliphatic side chains

1. Glycine 2. Alanine

3. Valine 4. Leucine

5. Isoleucine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

II. Amino acids containing hydroxyl (–OH)


groups

6. Serine

7. Threonine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

III. Sulphur containing amino acids

8. Cysteine

9. Methionine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

IV. Acidic amino acids and their amides

10. Aspartic acid

11. Asparagine

12. Glutamic acid

13. Gultamine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

V. Basic amino acids

14. Lysine

15. Arginine

16. Histidine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

VI. Aromatic amino acids

17. Phenylalanine

18. Tyrosine

19. Tryptophan

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

VII. Imino acid

20. Proline

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5
Essential or Indispensable Amino Acids


The amino acids which cannot be synthesised by the
body and hence need to be supplied through diet are
called essential amino acids. Some are
conditionally essential.

The ten essential am ino acids in ascending order of
dietary requirement:
1. Arginine 6. Isoleucine
2. Tryptophan 7. Valine
3. Histidine 8. Phenylalanine
4. Methionine 9. Lysine
5. Threonine 10. Leucine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Classification Based on Metabolic Fate


Ketogenic amino acids
Leucine is the only ex clusive ketogenic am ino acid.

Ketogenic and glucogenic amino acids
Isoleucine, lysine, phenylalanine, tyrosine and
tryptophan.

Glucogenic amino acids
The rem aining 14 amino acids are used for the
synthesis of glucose or glycogen.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
Classification Of Amino Acids Based On CHAPTER 5
Their Solubility


Polar (hydrophilic) amino acids
glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, asparagine,
glutam ine and tyrosine.

Non- polar (hydrophobic) amino acids
Phenyl alanine, tryptophan and proline.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Isoelectric pH

Various ionic forms of amino acid at different pH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Sorenson's titration curves of valine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Colour Reactions of Amino Acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Non- standard Amino Acids


D- amino acids

Non- Protein am ino acids

Am ino acid derivatives

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Precipitation Reactions of Proteins

1. Salting out

2. Isoelectric precipitation

3. Precipitation by heavy metal ions

4. Precipitation by alkaloidal reagents

5. Precipitation by alcohols

6. Heat coagulation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Classification of Proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Methods to Determine Protein Structure


Determ ination of amino acid com position in a
protein

Determ ination of the number of polypeptides in a
protein

Determ ination of amino acid sequence in a protein
Sanger's reagent
Edm an's reagent

Autom atic sequencing

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5
Methods to Explore Higher Levels of
Protein Structure

1. Electron microscopy

2. X- ray crystallography

3. Nuclear m agnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
Organisation of protein structure at CHAPTER 5

various levels

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Formation of Peptide Bond

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Primary Structure of Protein

 (psi) and  (phi) angles in the peptide backbone

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Forces Stabilising Protein Structure

Covalent bonds

Peptide and disulphide linkages
Non- covalent bonds

Hydrogen bonds

Hydrophobic interactions

Electrostatic interactions

Van der Waals interactions

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Secondary Structure of Protein

The polypeptide chain folded into regular (- helix , -


sheet) and irregular forms (turns and loops)
characterises the secondary structure.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Features of - helix

It is the first and the most comm on pattern (hence


designated a) of secondary structure.

1. - helix is the m ost stable conformation formed


spontaneously with the lowest energy.

2. It is a coiled structure with the tightly coiled


polypeptide backbone forming the inner part of the
helix with the side chains ex tending outwards from
the central ax is.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5
…Continued)

3. - helix can be either right handed or left handed.


But all a- helices found in proteins are right handed
(clockwise) because of the less probability of steric
clashes between the side chains and the backbone.

4. Covalent and various non- covalent forces stabilise


the - helix .

5. Ex cept the first and last peptide bonds at both


ends of the chain all other NH and CO groups take
part in hydrogen bonding.
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 5

6. Each turn of the helix is 5.4 Å and accom modates 3.6


amino acid residues per turn of helix .

7. Thus, the amino acids spaced three to four residues


apart in sequence are spatially closer to one another
and each amino acid form s a hydrogen bond with the
fourth amino acid in linear sequence. In contrast,
amino acids which occur closer in linear sequence are
situated on opposite sides of the helix and hence
cannot m ake contact.

8. Proline fits only in the first turn of an - helix ;


otherwise it is never found in an - helix .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

- Helix

- helix of a polypeptide chain


shown in a coiled structure
(right handed).
Only a few hydrogen bonds
are shown for clarity (dotted
lines).
Note that the side chains of
amino acids are not shown for
sake of clarity.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Features of - Pleated Sheet

1. It is the second type of regular repetitive pattern


(thus the name ) occurring in the secondary
structure of a protein.

2. Unlike the coiled - helix , the peptide backbone of a


- sheet is partly ex tended with a 'pleated
appearance'.

3. The distance between adjacent amino acids along a


- strand is 3.5 Å, in contrast to a distance of 1.5 Å
along an - helix . The side chains of adjacent am ino
acids orient in opposite directions to avoid steric
clashes.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5
…Continued)

4. - Pleated sheet is stabilised by ex tensive


hydrogen bonding. Hydrogen bonds can be
form ed between neighbouring polypeptide chains
or within a single polypeptide chain folded into
segm ents.

5. About two to fifteen strands are involved in the


form ation of a - sheet. Adjacent chains in a -
sheet can run in opposite directions (antiparallel 
sheet), in same direction (parallel  sheet) or both
ways (mix ed  sheets).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

- pleated sheets shown as a folded sheet

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

- Pleated Sheets

Anti parallel

Parallel

Hydrogen bonds are form ed between adjacent st rands wit hin a single polypept ide. Note t hat in bet a
sheet s running ant iparallel, hydrogen bonds bet ween NH and CO groups connect each am ino acid t o
a single am ino acid on an adjacent st rand. On t he contrary, in a parallel bet a sheet, hydrogen bonds
connect each am ino acid on one st rand wit h t wo different am ino acids on t he adjacent strand.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Tertiary Structure of Protein

Diagrammatic representat ion of super secondary motifs (- helix represented as


folded coil, - sheets as wide arrows and loops shown as connecting them).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Quaternary Structure of Protein


Proteins consisting of more than one polypeptide
chain display quaternary structure.


The protein is known as a multimeric protein or
oligomeric protein. For ex ample, hem oglobin, the
protein that transports ox ygen in the blood is an
oligomeric protein with four polypeptide chains (2 
and 2).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Denaturation

(a) Native protein (only (b) Denatured protein (note


disulphide bridges are shown that the disulphide linkages
which are intact) are broken)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5
How Do Proteins Attain Their Native
Conformation?

Levinthal’s paradox

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Principles of Protein Folding

1. The essence of protein folding is the retention of


partly correct interm ediates.

2. Molten globule

3. Enzym es aiding protein folding:


Disulphide isomerase,
Cis- trans isomerase

4. Chaperone proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 5

Diseases Related to Protein Folding


Prion diseases
Creutzfeldt- Jakob disease
Kuru
Mad cow disease


Alzheimer's disease

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition ) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 6

Chapter 6

Nucleotides and Nucleic


Acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Nucleotides

Nucleotide, the basic unit of nucleic acids is


com posed of three com ponents.

• Sugars in nucleic acids


• Phosphate group in nucleic acids
• Bases present in nucleic acids
Purines
Pyrim idines

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6
Structures of major purines (A, G) and
pyrimidines (C, T, U) found in nucleic acids

X = H or ribose or ribose phosphat e


depending upon whet her it is just a
base or a nucleoside or a nucleotide,
respectively.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Nomenclature of Nucleotides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Functions of Nucleotides

1. Nucleotides are the building blocks of nucleic


acids (DNA and RNA).
2. ATP is the universal energy currency of living
systems.

3. Cyclic nucleotides such as cAMP and cGMP act


as 'second messengers' .
4. Nucleotides are the structural components of a
num ber of coenzymes.

(cont inued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…continues) CHAPTER 6

5. They act as the carriers of certain metabolic


intermediates of carbohydrates, (UDP- glucose),
lipids (CDP- acyl glycerol) and proteins (S- adenosyl
m ethionine- SAM).

6. UDP- Gal UDP- Glu, GDP- Man, CMP- NeuAc, GDPFuc,


UDP- Xyl, UDP- Gal Nac and UDP- Glu Nac - These
eight m olecules are known as 'nucleotide- linked
sugars' and are im portant constituents of
glycoproteins.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Structures of biologically important
CHAPTER 6

nucleotides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Synthetic Nucleotides

Therapeutic applications
1. Synthetic nucleosides, cytarabine and vidarabine in
which ribose is replaced by arabinose are used in
chemotherapy to treat cancers.

2. Allopurinol is used in the treatm ent of


hyperuricem ia and gout.

(cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6
…continued)

3. Synthetic analogues such as 6- m ercaptopurine, 5-


fluorouracil, 5- iodouracil, 3- deox yuridine, 5 or 6-
azauridine, 5- or 6- azacytidine, 8- azaguanine, 6-
thioguanine are widely used by oncologists. They are
incorporated into DNA just before cell division, thus
blocking cell proliferation.

3. Drugs such as zidovudine which are used in the


treatment of AIDS are synthetic nucleotide analogues
with alterations in the sugar structure.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Structure of DNA
The double helical structure of DNA was first proposed by
Jam es Watson and Francis Crick in 1953.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6
Watson–Crick Model of DNA
Double Helix

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6
Watson–Crick Model of
DNA Structure
1. A DNA molecule consists of two chains of
deox yribonucleotides coiled around each other in
the form of a double helix. Two helical DNA chains
wind around each other on the same ax is to form a
right- handed double helix .

2. The two chains are antiparallel – one strand runs


in the 5' to 3' direction, while the opposite is in
the 3' to 5' direction. The term inal residue whose
C5' is not linked to another nucleotide is called the
5' end, and the terminal residue whose C3' is not
linked to another nucleotide is called the 3' end.
(continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

3. The two strands are held together by hydrogen


bonds between a purine base on one strand and a
pyrimidine base on the opposite strand. The ring
structure of each base occurs in a flat plane
perpendicular to the sugar–phosphate backbone,
resembling the steps on a spiral staircase. The base
pairing maintains a constant distance between the
sugar–phosphate backbones of the two strands as
they twist around each other.

…continues)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

4. The hydrogen bonds are form ed between a purine


base and a pyrimidine base only. This specificity is
imposed on the base pairings by the fix ed location
of the hydrogen bonds. If two purines face each
other, they would not fit into the space available
and two pyrimidines would be too far apart to form
hydrogen bonds. Each nucleotide base of one
strand is paired in the sam e plane with a base of
the opposite strand.

(continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

5. Three hydrogen bonds are form ed between the


purine, guanine and the pyrimidine, cytosine (G–C
or C–G pairing), while only two hydrogen bonds can
be form ed between the purine, adenine and the
pyrimidine, thymine (A–T or T–A pairing). As a
result, G always pairs with C, and A with T. This is
known as complementary base pairing. This
specificity has tremendous significance in DNA self
replication and transcription.

…cont inues)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

6. It is more difficult to separate the paired DNA


strands rich in G–C pairing because
GC (three double bonds) pairing is stronger than
A= T (two double bonds) pairing.

7. The deox yribose and phosphate groups (sugar –


phosphate backbone) are hydrophilic in nature and
hence are on the outside of the double helix
orienting towards the surrounding water m olecules,
while the hydrophobic bases are stacked inside.
…continues)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

8. The coiling of two strands creates a major groove


and a minor groove on the surface of the duplex .
Proteins interact with DNA at these grooves without
disrupting the double helix .

9 . Geometry of the DNA duplex: The width of a


double helix is 20 Å. Each turn of the helix is 34 Å
with 10 pairs of nucleotides, each pair is placed at a
distance of 3.4 Å.

…continues)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

10. Because of their length, DNA chains are described


in terms of base pairs (bp) or thousands of base
pairs (kilobase pairs or kb), e.g. [5 kb (virus),
2,50,000 kb (hum ans)].

11. The two antiparallel strands of DNA are not


identical in either base sequence or com position,
but are complementary to each other. Wherever
adenine occurs in one chain, thym ine is present in
the other and vice versa; similarly, wherever
guanine occurs in one strand, cytosine is found in
the other and vice versa.
…Continues)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

…continued )

12. The DNA duplex is stabilised by two forces; hydrogen


bonding between complementary base pairs and
nonspecific base- stacking interactions.

13. The strand that is transcribed or copied into the RNA


molecule is referred to as the template strand or anti
sense strand. The other strand is the sense or coding
strand of that gene. However it is noteworthy that each
DNA strand can act as a template for the synthesis of its
complem entary strand and hence hereditary information
is encoded in the sequence of bases on either strand .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Chargaff's Rules

1. The base composition of DNA varies in different species.

2. DNA from different tissues of the same species have


the same base composition.

3. The base com position of DNA in a species does not


undergo any change with the organism's age,
nutritional status or changing environm ent.

4. In all species, the number of adenine is equal to the


number of thymine residues (A= T) and the num ber of
guanine is equal to the number of cytosine residues (G 
C). Thus, the sum of the purine residues equals the sum
of the pyrimidine residues; that is,
A+ G = T + C.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Different Types (Forms) of DNA

• B- DNA

• A- DNA

• Z- DNA
Unusual structures in DNA

• Hoogsteen pairing

• Triplex DNAs

• Tetraplex

• Palindromes

Denaturation of DNA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Organisation of DNA

• Supercoiling of DNA

• Topoisomerases

• Nucleoproteins

Histones

Chrom atin

Covalent modifications

Nucleosomes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Mitochondrial DNA

• Apart from the nucleus, eukaryotic cells also have


other organelles such as m itochondria and
chloroplasts, which contain DNA. Mitochondrial
DNA is capable of encoding certain proteins and
RNA in mitochondria. The synthesis of about 13
proteins of the respiratory chain, are encoded by
m tDNA.

• mtDNA is inherited only from the mother!

• Leber's hereditary optic neuropathy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Genes

• Can a single gene be ex pressed into m ultiple


gene products?

• Coding and noncoding sequences in genes

Introns

Ex ons

• Transposons

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Centromeres and Telomeres

• The nucleoproteins which link the chromosome to


the mitotic spindle during cell division are anchored
to a specific region on the DNA known as the
centromere.

• This ensures an equal distribution of chromosome


sets to daughter cells.

• The guanine- rich sequences at the ends of


eukaryotic chrom osom es are known as telomeres.

(continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…continued) CHAPTER 6

• Telomeric DNA is synthesised and m aintained by an


enzym e known as telomerase.
The somatic cells of multicellular organism s lack
telomerase activity; however their germ cells have
active telom erase function.
The loss of telomerase activity allows the gradual
shortening of chromosomes with each cycle of DNA
replication and cell division until they reach
senescence (a stage at which there will be no more
division). Perhaps this is the basis of ageing.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Nucleases

Nucleases are enzym es that are capable of


degrading nucleic acids.
• Endonucleases
• Ex onucleases
• Restriction endonucleases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Types of RNA

1. Messenger RNA (m- RNA)


Messenger RNA is located in the cytoplasm and
transfers genetic inform ation from the DNA to the
protein- synthesising machinery on ribosomes.

2. Transfer RNA (t- RNA)


It also occurs in cytoplasm , it translates the
information carried by m - RNA into a specific
sequence of amino acids that are incorporated
into protein.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6
…Continued

3. Ribosomal RNA (r- RNA)


It is a com ponent of ribosomes which are the sites
for protein biosynthesis.

4. Heterogenous nuclear RNA (hnRNA)


It is the prim ary form of RNA in nucleus processed
into m ature m- RNA.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Messenger RNA (m- RNA)


Messenger RNA is synthesised as the prim ary
transcript from the template strand of DNA and
later processed to m - RNA.


5 capping

Poly ‘A’ tail

Heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Transfer RNA (t- RNA)

Transfer RNA is the adapter m olecule that translates


the information carried by m- RNA into specific
sequences of amino acids.

tRNA contains mainly four arms.


• Acceptor arm
• Anticodon arm
• D arm
• T  C arm

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 6

Structure of t- RNA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 7

Chapter 7

Enzymes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Enzymes


Enzymes are highly specialised proteins that act as
catalysts in biological systems (biocatalysts).

Enzym es are highly specific for their substrates

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Nomenclature and Classification
of Enzymes

International Union of Biochemistry (IUB) devised a new
system of nom enclature in 1964.


A four- digit Enzyme Com mission (E.C.) number is
assigned to each enzym e. The first digit represents the
class, the second digit indicates the subclass, the third
digit represents the sub- subclass and the fourth digit
specifies the individual enzym e.


Enzymes are classified into six major classes as per
the IUB system of enzyme classification.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Classification of Enzymes

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued ) CHAPTER 7

Classification of Enzymes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Enzyme Structure

• Enzym es are proteins.

• Apoenzym e

• Coenzym e

• Holoenzym e

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Active Site

The small cleft- like portion of an enzym e where the


substrate(s) binds and catalysis occurs is known as the
active site or active centre.

• Substrate binding site


• Catalytic site

A diagrammatic representation of
an enzyme and its active site

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Coenzymes
Coenzymes of B- complex vitamins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Coenzymes which are not related to vitamins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Enzyme Specificity

The active site in a specified conform ation on an


intact enzyme m olecule is largely responsible for
the enzym e specificity.

There are three types of specificity:


1. Stereo specificity
2. Substrate specificity
3. Reaction specificity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

How Do Enzymes Work?

• Transition state

• Ground state

• Activation energy

• Enzymes act by reducing the activation energies

• Binding energy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Effect of enzym e on activation
energy in a reaction

S = substrate
P = product

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

To summ arise, the energy required to surm ount the


activation barrier is the activation energy. Enzymes
catalyse the reactions by lowering the activation
barrier. The binding energy resulting from weak
non- covalent interactions between the substrate
and the enzym e reduces the activation energy.

Enzym es do not alter the reaction equilibria, they


only enhance the reaction rates by lowering
activation energies.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Mechanism of Enzyme Action

1. Lock and key model

2. Induced fit theory

3. Substrate strain theory

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Different models explaining
enzyme–substrate (ES) complex
formation

(A) Lock and key model


(B) Induced fit theory
(C) (C) Substrate strain theory

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Mechanism of Catalysis

• Acid- base catalysis

• Covalent catalysis

• Metal ion catalysis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Factors Affecting Enzyme Activity

The various factors that influence enzym e activity


are

1. Concentration of enzym e

2. Concentration of substrate

3. Concentration of product

4. Temperature

5. pH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Effect of Concentration of Substrate
on Enzyme Velocity


The rate of an enzym e catalysed reaction increases
as the substrate concentration increases until it
reaches a m ax imal rate, which remains constant
despite further increases in substrate concentration.


The substrate concentration (ex pressed in m oles/ L)
required to produce half- m ax imum velocity (1/ 2
Vm ax ) is known as Km or Michaelis–Menten constant.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Effect of substrate concentration on enzyme velocity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Derivation of Km or Michaelis–Menten Constant

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
…Continued

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
…Continued

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Effect of Temperature on Enzyme Velocity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Effect of pH on Enzyme Velocity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Enzyme Inhibition

Enzym e inhibition can be broadly classified into three


categories:

1. Competitive inhibition

2. Non- competitive inhibition

3. Allosteric inhibition

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Competitive Inhibition


The inhibitor binds with the enzyme through non-
covalent interactions and hence the pro cess is
readily reversible.

 In competitive inhibition, the Km value increases


whereas Vmax is unchanged.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Velocity versus substrate plot in
com petitive inhibition

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
Drugs acting as competitive CHAPTER 7

inhibitors

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Non- competitive Inhibition


The inhibitor binds to the enzyme covalently and
inactivates it making the process essentially
irreversible.

 In non- competitive inhibition, the Km value is


unchanged while V max is lowered.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Velocity versus substrate plot in non-
com petitive inhibition

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Regulation of Enzyme Activity

1. Allosteric regulation

2. Covalent modulation

3. Proteolytic trimm ing

4. Compartmentation

5. Control of enzyme synthesis and degradation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Allosteric Regulation


Allosteric enzymes

Allosteric m odulators

Cooperativity of allosteric enzym es

Classification of allosteric enzymes

K class allosteric enzymes

V class allosteric enzymes

Feedback regulation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Effect of substrate
concentration on allosteric
enzymes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Examples of allosteric enzymes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Covalent Modulation


Regulatory enzym es or rate- limiting enzymes

Reversible protein phosphorylation

Protein kinases

Protein phosphatases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Regulatory enzymes (rate- limiting enzymes) controlled by
covalent modulation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Isoenzymes

The multiple molecular form s of an enzyme catalysing


the same reaction are called isoenzymes.

They differ in their physical and chemical properties


such as structure, Km , Vmax , pH, electrophoretic mobility
and their susceptibility to inhibitors.

Isoenzyme variants are coded by different genes.

Allelozym es

Hybrid isoenzym es

Isoform s

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Creatine Kinase (CK)



Normal serum levels of CK are 15–100 U/ L in males
and 10–80 U/ L in fem ales.

Lohmann’s reaction

In m yocardial infarction, CK levels (CK–MB
isoenzyme) start to rise within 3–6 hours of
infarction.
Isoenzymes of CK

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH)

Norm al levels of LDH in serum are 100–200 U/ L.

Isoenzymes of LDH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Alkaline Phosphatase (ALP)

• The norm al serum Isoenzymes of ALP


levels of ALP range
between 40 and 125
U/ L.

• Increased ALP levels


are m ost com m only
associated with
bone disease and
hepatobiliary
disease.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Clinical Enzymology

• Plasm a specific enzymes


• Plasm a non- specific enzymes
• Units of enzym e activity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostic Markers of Myocardial
Infarction (MI)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7

Enzymes Used As Therapeutic Agents

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 7
Enzymes used in Laboratory
Measurements and Gene Transfer

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Section II
Molecules of Life

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 8

Chapter 8

Vitamins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Classification of Vitamins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Differences between fat- soluble and water- soluble


vitamins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Vitamin A

• Chemistry
Retinol
Retinal
Retinoic acid
- Carotene

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Summary of kinetics and mechanism of action of vitamin A

(Continues …

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

…Cont inued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Wald’s Visual Cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Other Biochemical Functions of
Vitamin A

1. Retinol and retinoic acid act like steroid hormones.


They regulate the synthesis of proteins involved in
cell growth and differentiation. Vitam in A is
required for normal reproduction.

2. Vitam in A is required for maintenance of healthy


epithelial tissue. It maintains moist and pliable
epithelium by inhibiting the synthesis of ex cess
keratin (responsible for horny surfaces).

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

…Continued)

3. Retinoyl phosphate synthesised from retinoic acid


participates in glycoprotein synthesis.
Glycoproteins are important constituents of
m ucus. In vitamin A deficiency, lack of mucus
secretion results in drying of epithelial tissues.

4. Vitam in A is essential for the formation of


mucopolysaccharides in the ex tracellular matrix .

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued )

5. Vitam in A is essential for the maintenance of the


immune system. Its deficiency causes
keratinisation of the m ucosal lining of the
respiratory, gastrointestinal and genitourinary
tracts m aking them susceptible to frequent
infections.

6. Retinol and retinoic acid are essential for the


synthesis of transferrin, the iron transportaing
protein. Irondeficiency anemia m ay occur in
vitamin A deficiency.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirements and Dietary Sources

1 RE = 1 g retinol
= 6 g - carotene
1 IU = 0.3 g retinol

The RDA for vitamin A are as follows


Men 1000 RE (3500 IU)
Wom en 800 RE (2800 IU)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Dietary Sources

• Animal foods: Liver, whole milk, eggs, butter,


cheese, fish and m eat. Fish (cod or shark) liver oils
are the richest sources of vitam in A. However, they
are generally used as nutritional supplements rather
than as food sources.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued)

• Plant foods: Among the best sources are green


leafy vegetables such as spinach and amaranthus,
which are available in all seasons.

The darker the green leaves, the higher is its carotene


content.

Vitam in A also occurs in vegetables and fruits such as


papaya, pumpkin and m ango. Carrots is also a good
source of vitamin A.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

The clinical signs of vitamin A deficiency mostly


involve the eye. Vitam in A deficiency is one of the
m ajor causes of preventable blindness.

Night blindness
Night blindness (Nyctalopia) or the inability to see in
dim light is the earliest sym ptom of vitam in A
deficiency. It occurs due to im pairment of dark
adaptation.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued ) CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Xerophthalmia

Night blindness, if left untreated, causes dryness of the


conjunctiva and the cornea.

The conjunctiva becom es thick and wrinkled; the


cornea loses its mucosal cells and becom e dull, hazy
due to keratinisation and loses its transparency. These
changes are described as x erophthalmia.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Bitot's spots
Bitot's spots are triangular, white patches on the
conjunctiva on either side of the cornea. They are usually
bilateral.

Keratomalacia
If the condition progresses beyond x erophthalmia, there
is ulceration and necrosis of the cornea (keratomalacia)
which results in total blindness. Keratom alacia is one of
the major causes of blindness in developing countries
and is usually associated with protein energy
malnutrition (PEM).
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Manifestation of vitamin A deficiency in the eye

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Vitamin D

Formation and Activation of Vitamin D

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Metabolism and Biochemical
Functions of Vitamin D

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirements and Sources


The recom mended dietary allowance (RDA) is about
400 international units (IU) or 10 g. However, in
places with good sunlight (like the Indian
subcontinent), the daily requirem ent is about 200 IU
or 5 g. In growing children, during pregnancy and
lactation, it should be 10 g (400 IU).


Vitamin D can be derived both from sunlight and
food. The human body m anufactures vitam in D with
the help of sunlight. It also occurs m ainly in foods of
anim al origin.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued)

Oily fish, egg yolk, liver, butter and cheese contain


good quantities. Fish liver oils, although not
considered a food, are the richest source of vitam in
D. Plant sterol, ergosterol provides a dietary source.


Breastmilk contains relatively sm all am ounts of
vitam in D and infants are at risk of developing
vitam in D deficiency, particularly prem ature infants
(since the vitamin is transported across the placenta
mainly in the last trim ester of pregnancy).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Skeletal deform ities seen in
rickets

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Rickets
• improper mineralisation
• bow- legs, knock- knees, pigeon chest,
kyphoscoliosis.
• ('rickety rosary')
• (Harrison's sulcus)

Osteomalacia
• Renal rickets
• Vitami- D resistant rickets

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Functions of Vitamin E

• Vitamin E plays a vital role in safeguarding the


structural integrity of biological m embranes.

Its antioxidant property prevents the ox idation of


polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) of mem brane
phospholipids.

By inhibiting lipid perox idation in cell m embranes,


it protects the structural integrity of the cell. By
the same mechanism, vitamin E is responsible for
the resistance of RBC to hem olysis (caused by
ox idising agents such as hydrogen perox ide).
(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 8

Functions of Vitamin E

It is observed that vitamin E is essential for normal


reproduction and fertility in ex perimental animals.
Hence, it is known as the ‘anti- sterility vitam in’.

It helps in m aintaining intact germinal epithelium


(gonads).

Deficiency of vitamin E adversely affects


spermatogenesis and m otility of sperms. However,
the effects of vitamin E on reproduction in humans
is controversial and evidence of any direct effect is
not fully established.
(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued)
Functions of Vitamin E

• It protects low- density lipoproteins (LDL)


from oxidation. (Note that ox idised LDL is
implicated in heart disease.) By doing so,
vitamin E reduces the risk of m yocardial
infarction.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

RDA and dietary sources of vitamin E

Men – 10 mg
Women – 8 mg

Vegetable oils are rich in vitamin E especially wheat


germ oil. Sunflower, safflower, cotton seed oils; corn
and soyabean oils are good sources.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Vitamin K – Biochemical Functions

Vitamin K is required for blood coagulation.


Clotting factors II (prothrombin), VII, IX and X need
vitamin K for their activation.

Vitamin K acts as a cofactor in the form ation of - carbox yglutamate.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

Vitamin K cycle in hepatocytes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirement and Dietary Sources


Since vitam in K is synthesised by the intestinal
bacteria, its requirem ent in the diet is very low. A
recommended daily allowance (RDA) of 70 –140
mg/ day would suffice for adult hum an needs.


Green leafy vegetables are an ex cellent source of
vitam in K. It is also present in eggs and diary
products.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations


Vitamin K deficiency leads to prolonged
coagulation and bleeding. Newborns, especially
preterm infants are m ore susceptible to vitamin K
deficiency

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued ) CHAPTER 8

Deficiency manifestations


Vitam in K deficiency is seen in adults suffering from
obstructive jaundice and other diseases causing
severe fat malabsorption. Patients suffering from
small bowel diseases such as celiac disease, Crohn's
disease suffer from vitam in K deficiency.

Patients on long- term antibiotic therapy (antibiotic


drugs kill vitamin K synthesising bacteria in the
intestine) are also at risk of developing vitam in K
deficiency.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Vitamin C

Different forms of vitamin C and its derivatives

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Role


Collagen formation
Vitamin C plays a role in the maintenance of
normal connective tissue and is essential for
wound healing.

Deficiency of vitamin C results in local hemorrhages


and bones become susceptible to fractures.
Collagen is also a constituent of the ground
substance surrounding capillary walls, hence
vitam in C deficiency causes capillary fragility.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued ) CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Role


Antioxidant: Vitam in C plays a role in elim inating
potentially dangerous free- radicals from the
biological system.


Role in metabolism
Vitamin C plays a role in the metabolism of amino
acids
Tyrosine; Tryptophan

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

…Continued)

Role in lipid metabolism


Role in iron metabolism
Role in hemoglobin m etabolism


It spares vitamins A, E and some B- com plex
vitam ins from ox idation.


Phagocytosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirement and Dietary Sources


Recomm ended daily allowance is about 60 –75
mg/ day. About 100 m g/ day is required during
pregnancy and lactation. Sm okers, chronic
alcoholics and wom en on oral contraceptives
require up to 125 mg/ day.


The m ain dietary sources of vitamin C are fresh
fruits and green leafy vegetables. Citrus fruits,
Indian gooseberry (amla), guava, cabbage, spinach
are very high in vitamin C content. Germ inating
pulses contain large am ounts of vitam in C.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Vitamin C deficiency causes scurvy. Symptom s of


scurvy reflect impaired collagen synthesis resulting in
defective connective tissue.


Capillary fragility: Petechiae (sm all, pinpoint
hemorrhages under the skin), ecchymoses or
even hematomas. Internal bleeding into the
gastrointestinal tract, peritoneal cavity,
pericardium and the adrenal glands m ay occur.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued ) CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

• Swollen and painful gums

• Teeth get loosened

• Poor wound healing and anemia

• Osteoporosis

• Barlow's disease

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Thiamine (Vitamin B1 )

Structure of thiamine and thiamine pyrophosphate (TPP)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions


Thiam ine ex erts its biochemical functions
through its coenzym e form , thiam ine
pyrophosphate (TPP).

Pyruvate dehydrogenase requires TPP as one of
the coenzym es.

- ketoglutarate dehydrogenase is also dependent
on TPP a a coenzyme.

Ox idative decarbox ylation reaction involving
branched chain am ino acids requires TPP.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions


Enzyme transketolase of hex ose m onophosphate
shunt (HMP shunt) utilises TPP as the coenzym e.


TPP plays a role in the transmission of nerve
im pulses.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirement and Dietary Sources


The recom mended dietary allowance (RDA) for
adults is 1–1.5 m g/ day.


Whole grain cereals, yeast, legum es, oilseeds and
nuts, especially groundnut, are im portant sources
of thiam ine. Animal foods such as pork, beef and
sheep liver are also good sources.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

• Wet beri- beri


It is characterised by cardiovascular signs and
symptom s such as edema of legs, face, trunk
and serous cavities.
• Dry beri- beri
In this type, the nervous system is affected. It
presents with progressive m uscle wasting,
peripheral neuropathy of the m otor and sensory
systems with diminished reflex es.
• Mixed beri- beri
• Infantile beri- beri
• Wernicke–Korsakoff syndrome

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Riboflavin (Vitamin B2 )

Coenzymes of Riboflavin
Riboflavin ex ists in two active coenzyme forms

1. Flavin mononucleotide (FMN)

2. Flavin adenine dinucleotide (FAD)

Flavin coenzym es mostly occur as prosthetic groups of


ox idoreductase enzymes. These enzym es are known as
flavoproteins.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Structure of riboflavin and synthesis
of FMN and FAD

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

Riboflavin through its coenzym e form s participates in ox idation-


reduction reactions in various m etabolic pathways and in the
respiratory chain
Common reactions involving FMN and FAD as coenzymes in various
metabolisms

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Dietary Sources And Daily
Requirement


Milk and other dairy products, lean meat, fish, eggs
and legum es are good sources.


The recom mended dietary allowance (RDA) for an
adult is about 1.5 mg, with slightly higher amounts
(by 0.2 to 0.5 m g/ day) recomm ended for pregnant
and lactating women.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations


Its deficiency usually occurs in association with
deficiencies of other Bcomplex vitamins. It usually
affects the tongue and lips; characterised by
glossitis (magenta tongue), angular stomatitis,
cheilosis (fissure- like lesions at the corners of the
m outh), pharyngitis and genital derm atitis.


Laboratory diagnosis done by measurement of
FAD- dependent glutathione reductase activity in
RBC.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Niacin

Coenzymes of niacin
1. Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD + )

2. Nicotinam ide adenine dinucleotide phosphate


(NADP+ )

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

Several enzym es require either NAD + or NADP+ in
ox idation–reduction reactions.


There is a fundamental distinction between NADH
and NADPH
- NADH generated in various catabolic pathways is
ox idised in the respiratory chain to generate ATP.
NADH thus plays a vital role in cellular respiration.

- NADPH serves as a readily available reducing power


in biological system s. It is used as a reductant in
biosynthetic processes.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Biosynthesis of nicotinamide nucleotides,
NAD + and NADP+

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 8

Biosynthesis of nicotinam ide nucleotides, NAD + and NADP+

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Selected list of enzymes
dependent on NAD + / NADH

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Selected list of enzym es dependent on NAD + / NADH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Mechanism of ox idation and
reduction of NAD +

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Generators and Consumers of


NADPH
Pentose phosphate pat hway of carbohydrates (HMP shunt) is the major
cont ributor of NADPH in cells

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Selected list of enzym es dependent on NAD +

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Pellagra
Pellagra is a classic disease caused by the deficiency
of niacin.

The disease is characterised by three D's –


dermatitis, diarrhea and dementia.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Pyridoxine (Vitamin B6 )
Vitam in B6 and its coenzyme [PLP]

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

…Cont inued) Vitamin B6 and its coenzyme [PLP]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions of B6

• Transamination

Transamination reaction
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued)

• Decarboxylation
Histam ine

Serotonin (hydrox y tryptamine)

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
…Continued

Catecholam ines

GABA (gamm a amino butyric acid)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

…Continued)

• Production of niacin coenzymes

• Heme synthesis

• Metabolism of sulphur- containing amino acids

• Phosphorylase

• Deamination

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Dietary Sources and Daily
Requirement


Plants contain B6 as pyridox ine, whereas anim al
tissues contain PLP and pyridox amine phosphate.
Rich sources of B6 include wheatbran, rice bran,
dried yeast, legum es, nuts, meat, fish, milk, eggs
and leafy vegetables.


Requirem ents are related to protein intake as it is
chiefly concerned with am ino acid metabolism . The
RDA for adults is 2 mg/ day. As usual, during
pregnancy and lactation it is slightly higher.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

Neurological symptom s include irritability,
generalised weakness, peripheral neuropathy,
personality changes including confusion and
depression.


Carpal tunnel syndrome
Hematological m anifestations include microcytic,
hypochrom ic anem ia due to diminished hemoglobin
synthesis. Platelet dysfunction m ay also occur.
Dermatological manifestations include seborrheic
derm atitis, stom atitis, glossitis and cheilosis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Drug interactions

• Isonicotinic acid hydrazide (INH- isoniazid) inhibits


the enzym e pyridox al kinase, thus affecting the
synthesis of PLP adversely.

• Wom en taking oral contraceptives are prone to


develop B6 deficiency as OCP are known to inhibit
enzymes dependent on PLP.

• Alcoholism m ay result in B6 deficiency, as


acetaldehyde which is form ed from ethanol can
compete with PLP for protein binding.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biotin
Biotin is more popularly known as anti- egg white
injury factor.

Structure of
biotin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions


Role in gluconeogenesis and Krebs cycle
Conversion of pyruvate to ox aloacetate is catalysed
by biotin- dependent pyruvate carbox ylase.


Role in fatty acid synthesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8


Role in the metabolism of odd- numbered fatty acids
and branched- chain am ino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Reaction mechanism of carboxylation by
biotin coenzyme

The conversion of pyruvate to ox aloacetate by pyruvate carbox ylase is


shown.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Daily Requirement and Dietary Sources


RDA of 200–300 mg/ day.

Liver, soyabean, yeast, egg yolk, peanut, grains are
all rich sources of biotin.

Deficiency manifestations

Biotin deficiency is uncomm on since it is synthesised
by the intestinal microflora and its ubiquitous
occurence in nature.


However, prolonged use of antibiotics that kill the
gut bacteria and ex cess consumption of raw eggs
result in biotin deficiency.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Pantothenic Acid

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Synthesis of Coenzyme A from Pantothenic Acid

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 8

Synthesis of coenzyme a from pantothenic acid

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Some Examples of Compounds Bound to
Coenzyme A

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

More than 70 enzymes have been identified till date that
are dependent on CoA making it the central molecule in
the metabolism of lipids, proteins and carbohydrates. A
few ex amples of enzymes involving coenzyme A are
given below.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Dietary Sources and Daily Requirements

Pantothenate is widely distributed in plants and


anim als. Ex cellent food sources include egg yolk,
liver, yeast, legum es, whole grains and vegetables.

A daily intake of 10 mg is recomm ended for adults.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Formation and Fate of Acetyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Folic Acid
Folic acid reduced to tetrahydrofolic acid

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Folic Acid

Folic acid reduced to


tetrahydrofolic acid

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

• Role in DNA and RNA synthesis: The one- carbon


groups are utilisef for the synthesis of C2 and C8 of
purine ring.

• Role in amino acid metabolism: THF is involved in


the conversion of serine to glycine, catabolism of
histidine and synthesis of methionine.

• Role in protein biosynthesis: THF is required for


the form ation of N- formylmethionine, which
initiates protein biosynthesis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Different One- Carbon Units Carried by


THF

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Daily Requirement


The RDA of folic acid in adults is about
200 μ g/ day.


During pregnancy (400 μ g) and lactation
(300 μ g).


An additional supplement is recomm ended during
pregnancy because its deficiency is linked to neural
tube defects and other congenital malform ations.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Dietary Sources


Folic acid is widely distributed in natural foods.

Green leafy vegetables, cereals, fruits, eggs and dairy


products are rich sources of folic acid.

Bananas, oranges, cauliflower and broccoli contain


high levels of folate.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

• Macrocytic anemia

• Neural tube defects in the fetus

• Hyperhomocysteinem ia

Histidine load test

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Folate Antagonists

Anticonvulsants and oral contraceptives interfere


with folate absorption and prolonged use of these
drugs m ay cause folate deficiency.

• Aminopterin (4- amino folic acid) and amethopterin


(methotrexate) (4- am ino, 10- methyl folic acid) are
structural analogues of folic acid. They competitively
inhibit the enzym e dihydrofolate reductase and block
the formation of THF.

• Trimethoprim inhibits folate reductase and blocks


the formation of THF. Sulphonamides are
compounds that are structurally similar to PABA.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Vitamin B12

Structure of vitamin B12

[R = substituted by
different groups]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Absorption, Transport And Storage of
Vitamin B1 2

HC – haptocorrin
IF – intrinsic fact or
TC – t ranscobalam ins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

Synthesis of m ethionine from hom ocysteine

Represent s blockage in B12 deficiency - - Folate trap).


(Continues

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 8

Biochemical Functions

Conversion of m ethylm alonyl CoA to succinyl CoA

Conversion of m et hylm alonyl CoA


to succinyl CoA involving vit am in
B12 as coenzym e

Blockage in B12 deficiency leads


to t he format ion of et hylmalonic
acid. The latt er is ex cret ed int o
the urine.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8
Daily Requirement And Dietary
Sources

Norm al daily requirement is about 1 μg.

Vitamin B12 is also synthesised by bacteria in colon.

It is not found in foods of plant origin. Hence, strict


vegans who do not consume milk products are at risk
of developing B12 deficiency.

Liver, m eat, fish, eggs, milk, curd and cheese are good
sources of vitam in B12 .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 8

Deficiency Manifestations

• Megaloblastic anemia

• Subacute combined degeneration

• Demyelination

• Pernicious anemia

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Section III
Physiological Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 9

Chapter 9

Biochemistry of Blood

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Plasma Proteins

Types of plasma proteins


The norm al total plasma protein concentration is around
6 to 8 g/ dl of blood. The m ajor form s of plasma
proteins are:

1. Albumin constitutes around 60% of all the plasma


proteins (3.5–5 g/ dl).
2. Globulins: Norm al plasma concentration is
2–3 g/ dl. Globulins occur in different forms:
i) a- globulins
ii) b- globulins
iii) g- globulins
3. Fibrinogen (0.2–0.4 g/ dl)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Separation of Plasma Proteins

1. Salting out technique

2. Electrophoresis

3. Ultracentrifugation technique

4. Cohn's fractionation

5. Gel filtration (m olecular sieving)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9
Electrophoretic
patterns: Normal
and abnormal

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Functions of Albumin

1. Maintains colloid osmotic pressure (COP) of plasm a

2. Transport function

3. Buffering action

4. Nutritional function

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Clinical Significance of Albumin


Album in, by binding to certain com pounds in
blood, prevents them from crossing the blood–
brain barrier, e.g., albumin–bilirubin complex ,
albumin–fatty acid com plex .
• Hypoalbum inem ia
• Tissue edem a
• Kwashiorkor
• Cirrhosis of liver
• Nephrotic syndrom e

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 9

Clinical Significance of Albumin

• paucialbum inuria or
• m icroalbuminuria


The normal albumin–globulin ratio (A/ G ratio) is
about 1.2:1 to 2:1. The A/ G ratio is lowered or
reversed either when album in is decreased or
globulins are increased, usually observed in
cirrhosis of the liver, nephrotic syndrome and
m ultiple m yelom a.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Globulins

Globulins constitute m ultiple proteins that are


separated into four distinct bands (1 , 2 ,  and ) on
electrophoresis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Major features and functions of plasma proteins

(Continues

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

…Continued) Major features and functions of plasma proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Structure of a Human Ig Molecule

V - Variable region, C - const ant region; each heavy chain is com posed of four unit s - V H ,
CH1 , CH2 , CH3 , while light chain consist s of t wo unit s - V L and CL.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 9

Classes of Immunoglobulins

Depending on the heavy chain make up, the


im munoglobulins are differentiated into five major
classes:

1. Imm unoglobulin G (IgG)

2. IgM

3. IgA

4. IgD

5. IgE

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9
Major characteristics of human
immunoglobulins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

Multiple myeloma

• Bence- Jones proteins

• Bradshaw’s test

• Amyloidosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9

RBC

• Structure
• RBC count
– Men 4.6–6.2 million/ L
– Women 4.2–5.4 million/ L
• Metabolism in RBC

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 9
Biochemical Basis of Diseases Affecting
RBC
Hemolytic anemias

• Hereditary spherocytosis

• hereditary elliptocytosis

• Hemoglobinopathies

• Sickle cell anem ia

• - thalassem ia

• - thalassem ia

• Genetic deficiency of glucose- 6- phosphate


dehydrogenase
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 9

WBC

Respiratory burst

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 10

Section III
Physiological Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Chapter 1 0

Hemoglobin - Chemistry of
Respiration

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Structure of Hemoglobin

Diagrammatic representation of tetrameric Hb (2 2 ) (heme is shown as


pink blocks).

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Structure of Heme

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Types of Hemoglobin

Types of normal hemoglobins

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Hemoglobin Derivatives

Apart from the normally found oxyHb and


deoxyHb, hem oglobin also ex ists in a few other
forms:

• Met- hemoglobin
• Carbox y- hem oglobin (CO- Hb)

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Myoglobin

• Myoglobin is a monomeric (with one polypeptide)


heme- containing protein occuring in muscle tissue.
In other words, it is identical to one subunit of Hb
m olecule.

• Myoglobin has higher affinity for oxygen than Hb.


Myoglobin serves as a reservoir for ox ygen and can
be considered an oxygen- storage protein.

• Raised myoglobin levels in blood is considered


to be the earliest marker of myocardial
infarction (MI).

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Blood- Gas Transport

• Respiratory quotient (RQ)

• Partial pressures of gases

• Gas ex change between alveoli and blood

• Gas ex change between tissues and blood

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Transport of Oxygen in Blood

Ox ygen dissociation curve of hemoglobin and myoglobin

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Cooperative Binding of Oxygen to Hb

( = T or taut form; = R or relaxed form).

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10
Oxygen Transport from Lungs to
the Tissues

Movement of inspired air into the alveoli is by bulk flow; all other
movements of ox ygen across membranes are by diffusion gradient.

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Bohr Effect

Bohr effect on ox ygen dissociation curve with an


increased H+ concentration.
Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

2 , 3 BPG

• Rapaport- Leubering cycle

• Mechanism of action of 2, 3- BPG

• Clinical significance of 2, 3- BPG

– High altitude

– Obstructive airway disease

– Anem ia

– Fetal hem oglobin (HbF)

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Effect of 2 , 3 - BPG on oxygen dissociation


curve

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10
Carbon dioxide transport from
tissues to the lungs

Carbon diox ide is


ex haled from lungs
by bulk flow; all
other movement s
of carbon diox ide
across membranes
are by diffusion
gradient.

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Sickle- cell Anemia

RBCs (A) From a normal person; (B) From a patient


with sickle cell anemia.

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

• Molecular basis of Hbs


• Homozygous and heterozygous Hbs

Diagram showing single base mutation in DNA (T "A) resulting in amino


acid substitution in the resultant polypeptide (b- globin chain of HbS).

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Mechanism of Sickling in Sickle Cell


Anemia

Diagram showing sticking together of deox y HbS molecules to form linear


multimers that cause sickling of erythrocytes.

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Sickle Cell Trait Protects from Malaria

It is observed that a very high num ber of black


Africans living in tropical areas infested with malaria
are heterozygous for HbS (sickle cell trait). They
possess the abnormal HbS gene in their genomes.

It appears that the sickle cell trait provides resistance


to malaria in these individuals.

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10
Biochemical basis of the diagnosis and
management of sickle cell disease

1. Sickling test

2. Electrophoresis

3. RDT

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 10

Thalassemias
Types of thalassem ias

(Continues…

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
(Continued… CHAPTER 10

Types of thalassemias

Universities
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Press
CHAPTER 11

Section III
Physiological Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 11

Chapter 1 1

Heme Synthesis and


Degradation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11

Structure of Porphyrin Nucleus

Pyrrole rings are numbered I, II, III


and IV; methyne bridges are
designated , , , and ; side chains
are labelled 1–8 ).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Porphyrins of clinical importance

A = Acetat e (–CH3 COO–)

P = Propionyl (–CH2 CH2 COO–)

M = Met hyl (–CH3 )

V = Vinyl (–CH = CH2 )

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Biosynthesis of Heme

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER 11

Biosynthesis of heme

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11

Overview of Heme Synthesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Summary of Major Features of
Porphyrias

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Degradation of Heme to Bile Pigments

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER 11

Degradation of heme to bile pigments

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Summary of Bilirubin Metabolism in Liver

Showing bilirubin transfer from blood to


bile involving three processes - uptake,
conjugation and secretion.
( = represent s blockage at the
respective st eps showing the diseases
that occur due t o the blockage).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11

Bilirubin Metabolism- Overview

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11

Differential diagnosis of jaundice

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 11
Congenital Hyperbilirubinemias

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Section III
Physiological Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 12

Chapter 1 2

Digestion and Absorption

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Functions of the Gastrointestinal Organs

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion and Absorption of Carbohydrates


Digestion in the mouth

Digestion in the small intestine

Non- digestible carbohydrates

Absorption of m onosaccharides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Mechanism of Absorption

Transport of glucose across the intestinalepithelium

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Lactose intolerance

Lactose intolerance is basically due to the deficiency


of the enzym e lactase (- galactosidase). Normally,
lactase hydrolyses lactose into galactose and glucose.
As lactase activity is also rate- limiting for lactose
absorption, deficiency of the enzym e hinders the
digestion and absorption of lactose in the gut.

Signs and sym ptoms of lactose intolerance include


diarrhea, flatulence, abdominal cramps, irritability,
etc.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

How to treat lactose intolerance?


By feeding a lactose free diet to the affected infants and
avoidance of lactose rich foods (milk and dairy
products) in adults. Synthetic preparations of -
galactosidase (lactase) are also available.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion and Abosrption of Lipids

Digestion in mouth and stomach


• Lingual lipase
• Acid stable lipase
• Gastric lipase
• Enterogastrone
• Satiety value

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

…Cont inued)

Digestion in intestine
• Em ulsiffication of lipids
• Role of bile salts
• Role of phospholipids as surfactant

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

…Continued)

Digestion of lipids by pancreatic enzymes in the


intestine
The lipolytic enzym es of pancreatic juice include:
1. Pancreatic lipase
2. Cholesteryl esterase
3. Phospholipase A 2

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion of Triacylglycerols (TAGs)

Progressive hydrolysis of TAG

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion of Cholesteryl Esters

Enzymatic degradation of cholesteryl ester

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion of Phospholipids
Enzymatic cleavage of phospholipids

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

…Continued)

Enzymatic cleavage of phospholipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12


Absorption of lipids

Bergstrom theory

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Fate of Lipids After Absorption

1. Resynthesis of lipids in the intestinal mucosal


cells
2. Secretion of lipids from the intestinal m ucosal
cells
3. Transport of dietary lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12
Resynthesis of lipids in intestinal mucosal cells and formation,
secretion and transport of chylomicrons

(Continues …

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
(…continued) CHAPTER 12

Resynthesis of lipids in intestinal mucosal cells and formation,


secretion and transport of chylomicrons

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12
Digestion and Absorption of
Proteins
Proteins are broken down by the hydrolysis of peptide
bonds and hence the enzym es involved are termed as
peptidases, belonging to the class hydrolases.
Peptidases are of two types:
1. Endopeptidases
2. Ex opeptidases
Ex opeptidases are subclassified into
carboxypeptidases (act on C- terminal end) and
aminopeptidases (act on N- term inal end).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Digestion of Proteins in the Stomach

• Hydrochloric acid
• Pepsin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12
Digestion of Proteins – Substrate
Specificity of Proteases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Meister cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Pancreatic digestion of proteins


• Intestinal digestion of proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 12

Mechanisms of Amino Acid Absorption

• Sodium- dependent active transport


• Di- and tripeptides
• Meister cycle (- glutamyl cycle)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 13

Chapter 1 3

A Journey into Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

Different Phases of Catabolism

(Contiunes…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

…Continued)

Outline of different phases of catabolism [All t he m ajor biom olecules – carbohydrat es, lipids
and prot eins undergo cat abolism t o finally yield acet yl CoA which is furt her ox idised in t he
citric acid (Krebs) cycle releasing carbon diox ide and reducing equivalent s (NADH + H + and
FADH2 ). Reducing equivalent s t hen ent er int o t he respirat ory chain, ult im at ely producing ATP
t hrough t he process of ox idat ive phosphorylation.]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13
Experimental Methods to
Study Metabolism


Metabolic inhibitors

Genetic mutations

Genetic manipulations

Radioactive isotopes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

Laws of Thermodynamics


First law of thermodynamics states that the total
amount of energy in the universe remains constant.
However, the form of the energy m ay change, but
within the total system , energy is neither destroyed
nor created during a physical or chemical change.


The second law of thermodynamics states that the
total entropy of a system must increase if a process
is to occur spontaneously.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

Free Energy

The energy available to perform work is known as


free energy. Gibbs proposed the theory of energy
changes during chemical reactions. Gibbs’ change in
the free energy (DG) is used in predicting the
feasibility of chemical reactions.

G = H – TS

where

H = the change in enthalpy (change in the heat


content of the reactants compared to products)

T = absolute temperature in Kelvin


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER 13

• Ex ergonic and endergonic reactions


• Chemical coupling

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

High- energy Compounds

A list of high- energy and low- energy compounds along with their standard
free energy (G°) on hydrolysis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

Structure of ATP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER 13

ATP- ADP Cycle

ATP- ADP Cycle: [ATP links the two major components of metabolism –
catabolism (breakdown of biomolecules) and anabolism (synthesis of
biomolecules)].

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
Chapter 1 4

Chapter 1 4

Central Metabolism:
Biological Oxidation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4
Acetyl Coenzyme A: The Central
Molecule of Metabolism

Structure of acetyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Sources and Fate of Acetyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4
Pathways linking the breakdown of organic nutrients to
the generation of ATP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Mitochondrion

(a)Mitochondrion as it appears under an elect ron m icroscope

(b) Diagram m at ic representation of t he mit ochondrion

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Krebs Cycle

Hans Adolf Krebs (1900–1981)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Location within the Cell and Overview

The enzymes of the TCA cycle are located in the


mitochondrial matrix.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Reactions of the TCA Cycle

1. Synthesis of citrate
2. Isomerisation of citrate to isocitrate
3. Ox idative decarbox ylation of isocitrate to -
ketoglutarate (- KG)
4. Ox idative decarbox ylation of - KG to succinyl CoA:
5. Formation of succinate
6. Ox idation of succinate to fum arate
7. Formation of malate
8. Conversion of malate to ox aloacetate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Krebs Cycle

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

…Continues)

Krebs cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Summary of the TCA Cycle

The net reaction of the citric acid cycle is as follows:


Acetyl CoA + 3NAD + + FAD + GDP + Pi + 2H2 O
2CO2 + 3 NADH + 3H+ + FADH2 + GTP + CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Inhibitors of the Citric Acid Cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Energetics of the Krebs Cycle


Generation of ATP per one Krebs cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Citric Acid Cycle – An Amphibolic Pathway

Biosynthetic role of the Krebs cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Anaplerotic Reactions of the Citric Acid Cycle

Anaplerotic reactions replenishing interm ediates of TCA cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Glycerol Phosphate Shuttle

Reducing equivalents transported are shown in red colour

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Malate- Aspartate Shuttle

Reducing equivalents are shown in red colour

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Electron Transport Chain

Redox couples

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Redox Potential
Redox potentials (Eo) of some ox idation–reduction systems

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Components of the Respiratory Chain

I. Nicotinamide nucleotides
II. Flavin nucleotides
III. Iron–sulphur proteins
IV. Coenzym e Q
V. Cytochromes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Organisation of Electron Transport Chain

Route- map of electron flow through ETC

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Route- Map For Electron Flow

Com plex I: NADH to Coenzym e Q


Com plex II: Succinate to Coenzym e Q
Coenzym e Q
Com plex III: CoQ to Cytochrom e C
Cytochrom e C
Com plex IV: Cytochrom e C to Ox ygen

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Inhibitors of the Electron Transport Chain

Site specific inhibitors of ETC

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

P:O Ratio


The P:O ratio can be defined as the number of
inorganic phosphate (Pi) molecules utilised for ATP
production for every atom of ox ygen consumed.

The ox idation of one m olecule of NADH through
ETC and ox idative phosphorylation yields about 2.5
ATP and the ox idation of one m olecule of FADH 2
yields 1.5 ATP.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Oxidative Phosphorylation

Chemiosmotic hypothesis

The electrochem ical gradient or proton gradient thus
developed, acts as the power that drives the
mechanism operating the synthesis of ATP

The essence of chem iosmotic theory is, the free energy
generated from the electron flow through ETC is
conserved by pumping protons out of the matrix to
create an electrochemical proton gradient across the
inner mitochondrial mem brane. The electrochemical
potential of this proton gradient is used to synthesise
ATP.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Chemiosmotic Theory

Diagram ex plaining
the chemiosmotic
theory of ox idative
phosphorylation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Structutre of ATP Synthase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Boyer's Binding Change Model

Boyer's binding change model for ATP synthesis by ATP synthase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Inhibitors of Oxidative Phosphorylation

• Oligom ycin
• Atractyloside
• Ionophores
• Valinom ycin
• Nigercin
• Uncouplers
• 2, 4- dinitrophenol (DNP)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4
Disorders Associated with ETC and
Oxidative Phosphorylation

• Alzheim er’s and Parkinson’s diseases


• Leber’s hereditary optic neuropathy
• MELAS (Mitochondrial Encephalopathy, Lactic Acidosis
and Stroke)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4
Enzymes Involved in Biological
Oxidation

The crucial enzym es of biological ox idation belong to


the group oxidoreductases. They are classified into
four categories.
1. Ox idases
2. Dehydrogenases
3. Hydroperox idases
4. Ox ygenases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Oxidases

These enzym es catalyse the rem oval of hydrogen


from a substrate and hand it over to ox ygen to
form water.

• Cytochrome ox idase
• Flavoproteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Dehydrogenases

These enzymes transfer hydrogen from one substrate


to another in a coupled ox idation–reduction reaction.
a) Cytochromes:
b) Dehydrogenases dependent on niacin
coenzymes:
NAD+ dependent dehydrogenases
NADP+ dependent dehydrogenases

c) Dehydrogenases dependent on flavin


coenzym es
FMN- dependent dehydrogenases
FAD dependent dehydrogenases
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
Chapter 1 4

Hydroperoxidases

Perox idase

Catalase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Chapter 1 4

Oxygenases

• Diox ygenases
• Monoox ygenases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
15

Chapter 1 5

Metabolism of
Carbohydrates

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Major pathways of glucose
utilisation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Facilitative glucose transporters 15

in different tissues

Note that each GLUT occurs in m ore t han one t issue. Only t he predom inant
t issue/ organ is shown in t he t able.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER

Glycolysis 15

Glycolysis is defined as the sequence of reactions


m etabolising one m olecule of glucose to two molecules
of pyruvate or lactate with the concomitant generation
of ATP.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Reactions of Glycolysis

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
15
Reactions of Glycolysis

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
15

Reactions of Glycolysis

In t he first half of the pat hway (react ions 1- 5) one


m olecule of glucose is convert ed t o two
glyceraldehyde- 3- phosphat e m olecules in a
series of reactions t hat consum es 2 ATP.

In t he second half of glycolysis t he two


glyceraldehyde- 3- phosphat e m olecules are
convert ed t o t wo
pyruvat e molecules, generating 4 ATP and 2
NADH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Conversion of Pyruvate to Lactate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Rapaport- Leubering Cycle in RBC

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
PDH Reaction

The reaction m echanism of conversion of pyruvate t o acet yl CoA cat alysed by PDH com plex

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Amount of ATP generated by the complete 15

oxidation of one molecule of glucose

*This calculation is based on the assumption that NADH produced in glycolysis is transport ed from the cytosol t o mitochondria by t he
glycerol- phosphate shuttle which yields only 1.5 ATP per NADH. If the NADH is t ransported by the malate- aspartat e shut tle, t he yield is
2.5 ATP per mole of NADH and t he total ATP per mole of glucose will be 32. However, the shutt le operative is tissue- specific (see
Chapt er 14, Mitochondrial Shuttles).

** There is a gain of an additional ATP during anaerobic glycolysis if t he start ing point of glycolysis is glycogen inst ead of free glucose,
since step I catalysed by hex okinase that utilises an ATP is bypassed.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Gluconeogenesis

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
15

The pathway of gluconeogenesis

[The substrates for gluconeogenesis are shown in . The key enzym es of gluconeogenesis are shown in .
The enzym es catalysing the irreversible steps in glycolysis are shown in . The num bers represent the entry of
glucogenic am ino acids. 1 Alanine, glycine, serine, cysteine and tryptophan; 2 Aspartate and asparagine; 3
Glutam ate, glutam ine, arginine, histidine and proline; 4 Valine, isoleucine, threonine and m ethionine; 5
phenylalanine and tyrosine.
Note that a few reactions of gluconeogenesis occur in m itochondria which are shown in a separate com partm ent —
area shaded in blue. The rem aining of the pathway occurs in cytosol.]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Reactions of Gluconeogenesis

1. Conversion of pyruvate to phosphoenolpyruvate


2. Conversion of fructose- 1, 6- bisphosphate to
fructose- 6- phosphate
3. Conversion of glucose- 6- phosphate to free glucose

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Cori cycle and glucose–alanine cycle

The Cori cycle (black)


Glucose–alanine cycle (peacock blue)
Other reactions are common for both cycles.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogenesis

1. Synthesis of UDP- glucose


2. Initiation of glycogen synthesis
3. Elongation of the glycogen chain
4. Form ation of ‘glycogen tree’

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogenesis

St eps in glycogen synt hesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogenesis

Glycogen synt hesis from

glucose )

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 15

Glycogen synthesis from glucose

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogenolysis

1. Action of glycogen phosphorylase


2. Action of debranching enzym e
3. Formation of glucose- 6- phosphate
4. Fate of glucose- 6- phosphate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogenolysis

Steps in glycogenolysis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Glycogenolysis 15

Degradation of
glycogen

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued) Degradation of glycogen (glycogenolysis)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Multiple Fates of Glucose- 6 - Phosphate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Regulation of Glycogenesis by 15

Covalent Modification

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Regulation of Glycogenolysis by Covalent 15

Modification

Calm odulin- dependent prot ein


kinase is not shown in figure for
t he sake of clarit y.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycogen Storage Diseases

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
15

Glycogen Storage Diseases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Overview of glycogen m etabolism in CHAPTER
15

glycogen storage disease

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Blood Glucose Homeostasis

Factors contributing to blood glucose


1. Dietary carbohydrates absorbed as glucose in the
intestine
2. Glucose released by glycogen breakdown from the
liver
3. Gluconeogenesis

Factors that remove glucose from the blood


1. Utilisation by the tissues for energy
2. Storage as glycogen
3. Conversion of surplus glucose into fat

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Glycemic Status


In norm al healthy individuals, fasting plasma
glucose levels are 7 0 –1 1 0 mg/ dl.

When the concentration ex ceeds the norm al range,
it is called hyperglycemia. When the values are
below the normal limits it is known as
hypoglycemia .

• Diabetes mellitus
• Hypoglycemia

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Blood glucose homeostasis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Role of Hormones in Blood 15

Glucose Regulation

Hypoglycemic effect

Insulin
• Prom otes tissue uptake of glucose
• Enhances glycolysis
• Favours glycogen synthesis
• Depresses glycogen breakdown
• Inhibits gluconeogenesis
• Inhibits glucagon release from the pancreas and
depresses glucagon gene ex pression
• Increases HMP shunt

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Role of Hormones in Blood 15

Glucose Regulation
Hyperglycemic effect

Glucagon
• Promotes glycogen breakdown in liver
• Enhances gluconeogenesis
• Depresses glycogen synthesis
• Inhibits glycolysis

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued)

Epinephrine

Stim ulates glycogenolysis

Decreases glucose use

Increases gluconeogenesis

Stim ulates glucagon secretion and inhibits
insulin secretion by the pancreas

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued)

Cortisol
• Stim ulates gluconeogenesis
Growth hormone
• Stim ulates gluconeogenesis
• Decreases glycolysis
• Antagonises insulin prom oted glucose uptake

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Hexose Monophosphate Shunt

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued) The reactions of hex ose monophosphate shunt

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
15
The reactions of hex ose m onophosphate shunt

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
An overview of HMP pathway

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Significance of the HMP Shunt

• HMP shunt is associated with the generation of two


im portant products, NADPH and pentose sugars .

• In the pentose phosphate pathway, five- carbon


sugars are formed, the most im portant being
ribose- 5 - phosphate. Ribose- 5- phosphate and its
derivatives are used as components in the synthesis
of DNA, RNA, ATP and nucleotide coenzymes such
as NAD + , FAD and coenzyme A.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued)

• NADPH is used as the reducing power in various


anabolic processes. It plays the role of a reductant
in biosynthetic processes such as fatty acid
biosynthesis, cholesterol and steroid biosynthesis,
nucleotide biosynthesis and neurotransm itter
biosynthesis.

• Antioxidant role

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Uronic Acid Pathway

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Metabolism of Fructose

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) (Continues… Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
15
Metabolism of Galactose

- Enzyme defect causes galactosemia.


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
15
Types of mucopolysaccharidoses

MR = m ent al ret ardat ion; CS = chondroit in sulfate; KS = kerat in sulfat e; HS = heparin


sulfat e; DS = derm at an sulfat e

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
16

Chapter 1 6

Metabolism of Lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16


Lipids, apart from their prim e function as a
storage form of energy, also act as structural
elem ents. Being hydrophobic, lipids are
unique am ong biomolecules.

The lipids in the body ex ist in three forms.
1. Structural lipids
2. Storage lipids
3. Plasm a lipids and transport lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Plasma Lipids

Lipids in human blood plasma

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Summary of Lipid Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Synthesis of Triacylglycerols

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lypolysis

Complet e hydrolysis of TAG (lipolysis)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lipolysis in Adipose Tissue Effected by Hormones

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Synthesis of Glycerophospholipids

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
16

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Summary of Biosynthesis of Ether Lipids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
An outline of the synthesis of sphingom yelin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Site- specific Hydrolytic Activity of 16

Phospholipases on a Phospholipid
Substrate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Degradation of Sphingomyelin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER

Biosynthesis of cerebrosides
16

Biosynthesis of cerebrosides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Degradation of sphingomyelins and cerebrosides with associated 16

inborn errors

Depict s enzym e deficiency

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Sphingolipidoses or lipid storage diseases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Eicosanoids 16

The structures of common eicosanoids and their parent molecule arachidonate

A subscript numeral indicat es t he num ber of double bonds (e.g., PGE2 with t wo double
bonds),which also represent s t he group which t hey belong to. All t he above compounds are
Group 2 eicosanoids.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Synthesis of Eicosanoids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Biosynthesis of Fatty Acids

Raw material for fatty acid biosynthesis


Acetyl CoA is the chief precursor and the source of
carbon atom s, NADPH (a reduced electron carrier) is
used as a reductant and ATP provides energy for fatty
acid biosynthesis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Shuttling of acetyl CoA from mitochondria to 16

cytosol for fatty acid biosynthesis

PDH = Pyruvate dehydrogenase; MDH = Malate dehydrogenase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Conversion of Acetyl CoA to 16

Malonyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Fatty Acid Synthase Multienzyme Complex

The complex is a dim er with two ident ical polypept ides 1 and 2 running ant iparallel t o each
other, each consist ing of seven enzym e act ivit ies and an acyl carrier prot ein– ACP).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Biosynthesis of Fatty Acids

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Biosynthesis of Fatty Acids CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Biosynthesis of Fatty Acids CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Biosynthesis of Fatty Acids CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

KS = Ket oacyl synthase


ACP = Acyl carrier prot ein

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Fatty Acid Oxidation

The - ox idation of fatty acids occurs in three stages.

1. Activation of fatty acids in the cytosol


2. Transport of fatty acids from cytosol to
mitochondria
3. Reactions of - ox idation in the mitochondrial
matrix .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Activation of fatty acid to
CHAPTER
16

acyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Transport of acyl CoA into mitochondria through the carnitine shuttle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
- oxidation of Fatty Acids

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
- Oxidation of Fatty Acids 16

Further processing of acetyl CoA through ETC and ox idative phosphorylation is briefly shown.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
An overview of the com plete ox idation of 16

palmitic acid

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Energetics of Palmitic Acid Oxidation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Oxidation of Odd- chain Fatty Acids

Conversion of propionyl CoA to succinyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Synthesis of ketone bodies

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Degradation of Ketone Bodies

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

Degradation of ketone bodies to acetyl CoA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Ketone Bodies

Formation, utilisation and ex cretion of ketone bodies

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

• Biochemical basis of ketosis in starvation and


diabetes mellitus
• Diabetic ketoacidosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Biosynthesis of Cholesterol

The synthesis of cholesterol can be studied


conveniently in five stages.

1. Form ation of HMG CoA


2. Synthesis of mevalonate
3. Generation of isoprenoid units
4. Synthesis of squalene
5. Form ation of cholesterol

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Biosynthesis of Cholesterol

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
…Continued)
Biosynthesis of Cholesterol

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Biosynthesis of Cholesterol
CHAPTER
16
…Continued

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
…Continued)
Biosynthesis of Cholesterol

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

Sum m ary of cholesterol synthesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Hormonal Regulation of Cholesterol 16

Synthesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Esterification of cholesterol in HDL 16

by LCAT

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Degradation of Cholesterol

• Synthesis of bile acids


• Synthesis of steroid hormones
• Synthesis of vitam in D

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Outline of Synthesis and Fate 16

of Bile Acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Cholesterol – Clinical Significance

• Plasma cholesterol
In healthy persons, the levels of total plasma
cholesterol vary between 1 5 0 –2 0 0 mg/ dl.

Principle of estimation
• HDL- C and LDL- C ratio
• Hypercholesterolemia
• Cholesterol and heart disease

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Management of Hypercholesterolemia

• Mevastatin (compactin)
• Lovastatin (mevinolin)
• Provastatin
• Simvastatin
• Starvostatin
• Cholestyram ine
• Cholestipol

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lipoprotein

Diagram showing a lipoprotein particle


[Note the hydrophilic ex terior and hydrophobic interior.]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Classification of Lipoproteins

Plasm a lipoproteins are separated by electrophoresis


into different fractions

1. Chylomicrons
2. Very low density lipoproteins (VLDL)
3. Low density lipoproteins (LDL)
4. High density lipoproteins (LDL)
5. FFA–Albumin com plex

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lipoproteins

Representation of comparative sizes of different lipoproteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Characteristics and com positions of hum an 16

plasm a lipoproteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Apoproteins

The protein part of lipoproteins is known as


apolipoprotein, or sim ply, apoprotein.

Functions of major apoproteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lipoproteins

Summary of lipid transport by lipoproteins


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
Transport of dietary lipids by 16

chylomicrons

Apoprot eins - A- I, B- 48, C- II and E; TAG – Triacylglycerol; C – Cholest erol; CE –


Cholest eryl est er; PL - Phospholipid; FFA - Free Fat ty acids; LPL - Lipoprot ein lipase;
CETP - Cholest eryl ester t ransfer prot ein; HL - Hepat ic lipase]

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Very Low Density Lipoproteins (VLDL) 16

Low Density Lipoproteins (LDL)

Transport of lipids by VLDL and LDL.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Cellular uptake of LDL- cholesterol by
CHAPTER
16

different m echanisms

The sm all red- balls represent protein clat hrin, sm all yellow- balls represent free cholest erol.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
High Density Lipoproteins (HDL)

Reverse cholesterol transport


The major function of HDL is to collect the ex cess
cholesterol from tissues and to transport it back to the
liver where it is ex creted in bile. This process is known
as reverse cholesterol transport.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
Metabolism of HDL enabling reverse
CHAPTER
16

cholesterol transport

Metabolism of HDL enabling reverse cholesterol transport.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Disorders of Lipoproteins
Classification and characteristics of hyper and hypolipoproteinemias

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Sum mary of Hyperlipoproteinem ias

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Fatty Liver

Though lipids are synthesised by the liver they are not


stored by it.
The term fatty liver represents the ex cess deposition of
fats in the liver beyond its capacity to utilise or
transport them.

Causes
• Increased synthesis of TAG: High fat intake
• Reduced utilisation and rem oval of fats
• In protein- energy malnutrition (PEM)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16

To summ arise:

Increased synthesis, mobilisation and decreased


oxidation of fatty acids coupled with impaired
lipoprotein secretion by the liver leads to fatty
liver.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Causes of fatty liver

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Lipotropic Factors

The substances that play active role in the removal of


fats from the liver by different mechanisms, thus
preventing the risk of developing fatty liver are known
as lipotropic factors. They include

• Choline
• Inositol
• Methionine
• Betaine
• Vitamin E and selenium
• Om ega- 3 fatty acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Lipid Metabolism and Cardiovascular 16

Disease

• Plasma lipid profile


• Risk factors for cardiovascular disease
• Atherosclerosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease

• Avoid smoking
• Ex ercise regularly and maintain norm al body
weight
• Dietary m easures

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
16
Alcohol Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
17

Chapter 1 7

Metabolism of Amino Acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Protein Turnover


Body protein content is not static but ex ists in
a dynamic steady state.

It is estimated that about 300–400 g of
protein is degraded and synthesised a day,
which represents the body protein turnover.

How does a cell recognise proteins that are
to be degraded?
• Ubiquitin
• Proteosome

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Amino Acid Pool

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Amino Acid Metabolism – An Overview

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Metabolism of Amino Acids – Fate of 17

Amino Group

Transmination
The transfer of an - amino group from an -
am ino acid to an - keto acid is known as
transam ination. The reaction involves the
interconversion of a pair of am ino acids and
a pair of keto acids. The overall process is
catalysed by a group of enzym es known as
transaminases or aminotransferases. The
derivative of vitamin B6 - pyridoxal
phosphate (PLP) acts as the coenzym e.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

• Mechanism of transamination
• Significance of transm ination

Transamination reaction

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Transamination

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Mechanism of transam ination 17
…Continued)

A and B : Reactions catalysed by ALT and AST, respectively. C : Formation of Schiff base

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Deamination

• Ox idative deam ination


Ox idative deam ination by glutam ate
dehydrogenase

Ox idative deamination of glutamate by GDH.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Oxidative deamination by amino acid oxidase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Non- oxidative deamination


• Hydrox y amino acids

• Sulphur am ino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

• Deamination of histidine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Balance in Ammonia Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Transport of Ammonia

• Glutamine as a ‘store- house’ of amm onia


• Transport of amm onia through alanine

Synthesis of glutamine and its conversion to glutamate.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Ammonia Toxicity


Ammonia toxicity

Removal of ammonia
Amm oniotelics
Uricotelic
Ureotelic

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Urea Cycle

Outline of the urea cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Reactions of the Urea Cycle

• Formation of carbamoyl phosphate


• Formation of citrulline
• Synthesis of argininosuccinate
• Cleavage of argininousuccinate
• Urea form ation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Urea Cycle

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)
Reactions of the urea cycle

Note that in the


synthesis of urea,
one amino group is
obtained from the
ammonium ion,
while the other is
contributed by
aspartate; carbon
atom comes from
CO2 (as bicarbonate).

This is represented
in different colours.
The first two
reactions of the cycle
occurs in the
mitochondria.

The rest of the cycle


occurs in cytosol.
(NAG — N- acetyl
glutamate).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Metabolic Link Between Urea Cycle and 17

TCA Cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Metabolic Defects in the Urea Cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Blood Urea – Clinical Application


Urea levels in the blood are estim ated to assess
kidney function. In healthy individuals, the normal
blood urea concentration ranges between 15 –40
m g/ dL.


The term uremia is used to refer to elevated blood
urea due to renal disease. The conditions in which
blood urea levels are elevated are classified into
three categories.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

1 . Pre- renal
Severe dehydration, fevers, diabetic coma,
thyrotox icosis, severe burns and so on are
pre- renal causes of elevated urea levels.
2 . Renal
Blood urea is increased in kidney diseases such as,
acute glomerulonephritis, pyelonephritis, polycystic
kidney, nephrotic syndrom e and so on.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

3 . Post- renal
When there is an obstruction to the flow of urine
(e.g. stones, tumours, stricture urethra,
enlargm ent of prostate and so on) blood urea is
elevated, due to the increased reabsorption in the
renal tubules.

Blood urea nitrogen (BUN)


BUN = ½ NPN (approx .)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Summary of Glycine
Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Metabolism of Glycine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Biologically important compounds 17

synthesised from glycine

1 . Synthesis of purine ring: Glycine contributes to the


C4 , C5 and N7 of the purine ring.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

2 . Synthesis of heme

3 . Formation of glutathione
4 . Glycine as conjugating agent
5 . Glycine as a neurotransmitter

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Formation of Creatine

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

...Continued…

Synthesis and degradation of creatine


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
Differences between Creatine and 17

Creatinine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Metabolic Errors of Glycine

• Primary hyperox aluria


• Glycinem ia and glycinuria

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Summary of Branched Chain Amino Acids

(Continues….

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Diseases of the metabolism of 17

branched- chain amino acids

1 . Maple syrup urine disease: This metabolic disorder


occurs due to a defect in the enzym e branched-
chain - keto acid dehydrogenase

2 . Isovaleric acidemia: Deficiency of the enzyme,


isovaleryl CoA dehydrogenase

3 . Hypervalinemia

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Serine

Metabolic role of serine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Threonine

Outline of threonine metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Sulphur Amino Acids

Outline of metabolism of sulphur amino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Outline of metabolism of sulphur 17

amino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
S- Adenosylmethionine (SAM) 17

Form ation, utilisation and


regeneration

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Formation of Cystine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Synthesis of Cysteine

Synthesis of cysteine from methionine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Metabolism of Cysteine

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Formation of PAPS

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Significance of cysteine metabolism


Taurine

PAPS (3’- Phosphoadenosine- 5-
phosphosulphate)

Glutathione

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Inborn Errors of Sulphur Amino
Acids


Cystinuria

Cystinosis

Hom ocystinurias

Homocystinuria type I: The defect in the enzym e


cystathionine synthase causes abnormal
accumulation of homocysteine and methionine.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Cystathionuria: It occurs due the deficiency of


cystathionase.

It results in mental retardation, endocrine


disorders, anemia and so on.

Deficiency of vitamin B6 may sometimes be


associated with this disorder.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Outline of aspartate and 17

asparagine metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Outline of glutamate and glutamine 17

metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Synthesis of biologically important 17

substances from glutamate

1. N- acetylglutam ate (NAG)


2. Glutathione
3. - Carbox yglutamate
4. Glutam ate as a neurotransm itter
5. - Am inobutyric acid (GABA)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Lysine

Summ ary of lysine degradation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Metabolism of glutamate, glutamine, 17

histidine, arginine and proline

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

All t he five amino


acidsglutam at e, glut am ine,
hist idine, arginine and
proline are degraded t o -
ket oglut arate.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Metabolism of Arginine

Metabolism of arginine - overview

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Nitric Oxide (NO)

Functions of nitric oxide


1. Nitric ox ide is a potent vasodilator.
2. NO acts as a neurotransmitter
3. It stimulates the release of hormones (GHRH, CRH)
from the hypothalam us.
4. It is involved with the potential bactericidal actions
of macrophages

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Therapeutic effects of NO

1. NO as nitroglycerine is used in the treatm ent of


angina pectoris.

2. Inhalation of NO gas is em ployed in the treatment of


pulmonary hypertension.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Phenylalanine and Tyrosine

Summary of phenylalanine and tyrosine metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Summ ary of phenylalanine and 17

tyrosine metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Conversion of Phenylalanine to Tyrosine

Form ation of tyrosine from phenylalanine. ( – Block in phenylketonuria).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Degradation of Phenylalanine and Tyrosine 17

The circled numbers indicate sites of metabolic defects.


1 Phenylketonuria ; 2 Tyrosinemia type II ; 3 Neonatal tyrosinemia ; 4 Alkaptonuria

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

The circled numbers indicate


sites of metabolic defects.
5 and 6 Tyrosinemia (type I)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Synthesis of Catecholamines from


Tyrosine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Synthesis of Thyroid Hormones 17

from Tyrosine

Not e that t yrosine residues occur as a part of t hyroglobulin, a huge glycoprot ein t hat
occurs in t he lum en of t hyroid follicles.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
17
Synthesis of Melanin from Tyrosine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Metabolic Defects of Phenylalanine and 17

Tyrosine
Phenylketonuria
Enzyme defect in PKU: Phenylketonuria results from a
deficiency of the enzym e, phenylalanine hydroxylase.

Altered metabolism in PKU

Clinical features of PKU

Diagnosis of PKU
– Phenylalanine levels in blood
– Ferric chloride test
– Guthrie test
– DNA probes

Management of PKU

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Alkaptonuria

Enzym e defect

Biochemical changes in alkaptonuria

Diagnosis and treatm ent
Albinism
Tyrosinem ias
Tyrosinem ia type I (hepatorenal tyrosinemia)
Tyrosinem ia type II (Occulocutaneous tyrosinem ia)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Sum mary of phenylalanine m etabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Outline of tryptophan metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Tryptophan

The metabolism of tryptophan can be studied in two


different pathways.

I.Kynurenin–Nicotinate pathway

II. Serotonin–Melatonin pathway

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Kynurenin–Nicotinate Pathway

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

PLP – pyridox al phosphate; PRPP – phosphoribosylpyrophasphate; QPRT – quinolinate phosphoribosyl transferase

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

Summary of kynurenin–nicotinate pathway

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Serotonin–Melatonin Pathway

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Serotonin


Synthesis of serotonin

Degradation of serotonin

Biological role of serotonin
1. Serotonin is a potent vasoconstrictor and
causes sm ooth muscle contraction in
arterioles and bronchioles.
2. It serves as an ex citatory neurotransmitter in
the brain

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

3. Serotonin causes peristalsis and causes the release


of peptide horm ones from GI tract.
4. It is capable of influencing the behavioural patterns
in humans.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Degradation of Tryptophan

Degradation of tryptophan
to indoleacetate

Indo le ace tate

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
One- Carbon Metabolism

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

Summary of one- carbon metabolism


(Some ex perts consider even CO2 as a one- carbon carrier.
Carbon diox ide is involved in several carbox ylation reactions dependent
on biotin. For instance, conversion of pyruvate ox aloacetate in
gluconeogenesis)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Polyamines

Biosynthesis of polyamines

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17
Biologically important compounds generated from amino acids

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Summary of Inborn Errors of Amino Acid 17

Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Summary of the Metabolic Fate 17

of Amino Acids

Note that some amino acids appear more than once, reflecting different fates for different parts of their
carbon skeletons. Glucogenic amino acids depicted in black, ketogenic in red and both glucogenic and
ketogenic in green.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Classification of amino acids based on the 17

metabolic fate of their carbon skeletons

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

The Nitrogen Cycle

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Outline of Biosynthesis of 17

20 Amino acids

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
17

…Continued)

Out line of biosynt hesis of 20 am inoacids in plants and microorganism s. Not e that t he
precursors from glycolysis (red), HMP pat hway (blue) and t he citric acid cycle (green) are
shaded, and am ino acids derived from t hem are shown in box es of corresponding colours).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
18

Chapter 1 8

Metabolism of Nucleotides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Biosynthesis of Purine Nucleotides

The sources of nitrogen and carbon atoms of the purine ring

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
De Novo Synthesis of Purine Nucleotides

(Continued…

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
18

De Novo Synthesis of Purine Nucleotides

(Continued…

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER
18

De Novo Synthesis of Purine Nucleotides

(Continued…

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued CHAPTER
18

De Novo Synthesis of Purine Nucleotides

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Synthesis of AMP and GMP from IMP

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
…Continued) Synthesis of AMP and GMP from IMP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Salvage Pathways

Free purine bases, derived from the norm al turnover of


nucleic acids are recycled in tissues incapable of de novo
synthesis such as the brain, RBC and neutrophils.

These free purine bases are reconverted to their


corresponding nucleotides and this process is known as
the salvage pathway.

Salvage reactions require far less energy compared to de


novo synthesis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Role of Phosphoribosyl Pyrophosphate
(PRPP)
Phosphoribosyl pyrophosphate (PRPP) plays a crucial
role in salvage pathways by acting as the donor of
ribose 5- phosphate.

PRPP - Phosphoribosyl pyrophosphat e; PPi - Inorganic pyrophosphat e; AMP -


Adenosine monophosphat e; GMP - Guanosine monophosphat e; IMP - Inosine
monophosphat e

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Salvage pathways of purine nucleotide
synthesis

* Deficiency of HGPRT causes Lesch–Nyhan syndrom e.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Synthesis of Deoxyribonucleotides

Formation of deox yribonucleotides from ribonucleotides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Degradation of Purine Nucleotides

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
…Continued) CHAPTER
18

Degradation of Purine Nucleotides

Not e that purine ribonucleot ides and deox yribonucleotides are degraded by t he same
pat hway and enzymes).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Sources and Excretion of Uric Acid

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Disorders of Purine Metabolism

Most of the disorders of purine metabolism are


associated with hyperuricemia, a term that refers to
elevated levels of uric acid in the blood – above 7.0
mg/ dl in men and above 6.0 m g/ dl in women.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER

Gout 18

• Primary gout
• Hyperactivity of PRPP synthetase
• Superactivity of PRPP glutamyl am idotransferase
• HGPRT deficiency
• Glucose- 6- phosphatase deficincy
• Secondary gout
• Treatment of gout

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Lesch–Nyhan Syndrome


This genetic disorder is characterised by spasticity,
m ental retardation, self- injurious behaviour and
gout. It was first described in 1964 by a m edical
student, Michael Lesch, and his professor, William
Nyhan.


Inherited deficiency of the purine salvage enzyme,
hypoxanthine- guanine
phosphoribosyltransferase (HGPRT), is
responsible for the Lesch–Nyhan syndrom e.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Immunodeficiency diseases associated with 18

purine metabolism


Severe combined imm unodeficiency (SCID)

Gene therapy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
Sources of Pyrimidine Ring

Sources of carbon and nitrogen atoms in


the pyrimidine ring

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
De novo synthesis of pyrimidine 18

nucleotides

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
18
…Continued De novo synthesis of pyrimidine nucleotides

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
19

Chapter 1 9

Integration of Metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19


The reactions occurring in various m etabolic
pathways do not occur in isolation; they occur in an
integrated, well- coordinated manner based on the
overall requirements of the organism.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19


The pathways of all three classes of biomolecules
are interlinked through som e common
intermediates.
All these biom olecules are catabolised by the Krebs
cycle, electron transport chain and generate energy
(ATP) through ox idative phosphorylation.
Each class of these biomolecules provides the raw
materials for the synthesis of the components of
other classes.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
The inter- relationships between the metabolic pathways of
carbohydrates, lipids and proteins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Summary of pathways of 19

various metabolisms

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Cont inued)
Summary of pathways of various metabolisms

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Cont inued)
Summary of pathways of various metabolisms

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
Fast- Feed Cycle

What happens in the body in a day?


Studying the metabolic changes after an evening
m eal, fasting at night and the re- fed state after
breakfast is known as the fast–feed cycle or starve–
feed cycle.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
The Fed State


The biochemical changes following the
consum ption of food constitute the well- fed or
post- prandial state.


The carbohydrate content of the diet after
digestion is mostly absorbed as glucose and enters
the blood. The rise in blood glucose levels induce
the beta cells of the islets of Langerhans in the
pancreas to secrete insulin.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Continued)


Within the cells, the glucose is converted to pyruvate
or lactate by glycolysis or it is used in the HMP
shunt for the formation of NADPH and pentose
sugars.


Availability of a plentiful supply of glucose in the
well- fed state coupled with the high insulin levels
result in the storage of glucose as glycogen
(glycogenesis) in the liver and m uscle. The liver, by
thus storing glucose as glycogen during the fed
state, releases glucose into blood from its stores
(glycogenolysis) in between meals.
(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Continued)


Dietary proteins are digested and absorbed as
amino acids in the intestine. Very small amounts
are used by the intestinal cells and the rest is
transported through portal blood to the liver and all
other tissues where they are prim arily used for
protein synthesis.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Continued)


The dietary lipids are packaged into chylomicrons
in the intestinal epithelial cells and are transported
to the blood through the lym phatic system.

Most of the triacylglycerols (TAG) present in


chylom icrons are hydrolysed by lipoprotein lipase
(LPL) in various tissues, especially in adipose tissue.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
…Continued)


The TAG thus produced from dietary fat in the liver
along with sm all am ounts of TAG produced from
glucose and amino acids by de novo synthesis
(endogenous fat) are packaged into very low density
lipoproteins (VLDL) and secreted by the liver into the
blood.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
Metabolism in the Fed State

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
The Fasting State


The fasting state constitutes the period after an
evening m eal, ex tending into the fasting state
during the night until breakfast the nex t m orning.


The glucose levels in the blood start dropping after
a few hours during the post absorptive period. The
fall in blood glucose decreases insulin secretion and
stim ulates glucagon secretion. Glucagon stimulates
glycogen breakdown and inhibits glycogen
synthesis.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 19


As a result, glycogenolysis in the liver contributes
to blood glucose in the early fasting state.


In addition, glucagon also inhibits glycolysis
Glucagon also inhibits fatty acid synthesis


The liver glycogen levels are depleted by late night
and the early hours of the morning (8–10 hours
after supper), and the body switches over to hepatic
gluconeogenesis to maintain the blood glucose
levels.
(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 19


Since the fatty acids cannot be used for the
synthesis of glucose, the net glucose synthesis by
gluconeogenesis derives its carbon source from
glycerol and m uscle proteins.


A substantial amount of acetyl CoA produced by
fatty acid ox idation is used for the formation of
ketone bodies

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
Metabolism in the Fasting State

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
The Re- fed State


After breakfast, fat is metabolised as described in
the normal fed state. But glucose is metabolised
differently. The liver does not use the glucose which
is available aplenty in the blood, but leaves it for
the peripheral tissues. Interestingly, the liver
continues to remain in the gluconeogenic mode for
3–4 hrs after feeding. The glucose synthesised by
gluconeogenesis is used to replenish the liver ’s
glycogen stores.

(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 19


The gluconeogenic mode of the liver com es to an
end and the liver starts synthesising glycogen
directly from fresh blood glucose.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
Metabolism in Starvation


When the fasting state is prolonged, it results in
starvation. During starvation, the entire body
m etabolism is reorganised for the survival of the
organism.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
19
Metabolism in Starvation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edn) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Section IV
Metabolism

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
20

Chapter 2 0

Metabolism of Xenobiotics:
Detoxification

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20


Human beings are ex posed to a number of foreign
chemicals in their day- to- day life. This includes food
additives, pesticides, cosmetics, environmental
pollutants and most important, drugs. All these
foreign chem icals are collectively called
'x enobiotics’.


When drugs and other x enobiotics gain access to the
hum an biological system, they undergo chemical
alteration, a process known as biotransformation.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
How Does the Body Handle Foreign 20

Compounds?

Even though all tissues m etabolise x enobiotics, the
liver is the major organ involved.

The m etabolism of x enobiotics is considered in two
phases.

• Phase I reactions
Hydrox ylation, Reduction and Hydrolysis
• Phase II reactions
• Conjugation reactions

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Phase I Reactions 20

1 . Oxidation or Hydroxylation

Cytochrome P45 0 hydroxylase cycle


Fe2 S2 (iron- sulphur prot ein), e– (elect ron), CO (carbon m onox ide)inhibit s t he indicat ed st ep,
* represent s an addit ional elect ron

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Reduction
The nitro compounds are reduced to their am ines and
aldehydes, ketones are reduced to alcohols, e.g.,

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Hydrolysis
Many of the tox ic m olecules in the body are broken
down into smaller molecules by hydrolysis. The
hydrox yl group and the hydrogen ion of H 2 O are
transferred to different fragm ents of the substrate.

Bonds such as glycoside, ester, amides and so on are


bio- transformed by hydrolysis. Aspirin, the popular
analgesic, is metabolised by hydrolysis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Phase II Reactions

A x enobiotic m etabolised into a polar com pound in


phase I reactions m ay not be sufficiently polar to be
eliminated easily from the body. Usually, these
interm ediates need to undergo more biotransform ation
reactions. Phase II reactions, m ostly conjugating
reactions, metabolise these hydrox ylated byproducts
into even m ore hydrophilic m olecules. As a result, they
are easily elim inated from the body.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20
Conjugation

Conjugation involves the addition of body metabolites


to x enobiotics rendering them more polar, non- tox ic
and easily ex cretable com pounds.

Glutathione

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Glycine
As a part of norm al body m etabolism, glycine
conjugates bile acids. It also detox ifies m any other
substances, e.g. benzoic acid (a food preservative).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Glucuronic acid

Sulphation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
20

Acetylation

Methylation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

Section V
Nutrition

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
21

Chapter 2 1

Minerals

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

Nutrients are of two categories



Macronutrients

Micronutrients

About 17 inorganic elements serve as essential


dietary constituents for humans. These minerals are
broadly classified as

(1) major elements that include electrolytes and


(2) trace elem ents.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

List of mineral elements

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Calcium

Dietary sources
Milk and m ilk products are rich sources for calcium .
Leafy vegetables, beans, egg and fish (eaten with
bones) also contain good amounts of calcium.
Cereals (wheat, rice) contain only small amounts of
calcium.
But cereals are the staple diet in India. Therefore,
cereals form the m ajor source of calcium in our diet.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Calcium

Daily requirement
An adult needs 800 mg/ day and a child about 1.2
g/ day.
Requirem ent m ay increase to 1.5 g/ day during
pregnancy and lactation.
After the age of 50, there is a general tendency to
develop osteoporosis, especially in post- menopausal
wom en, which may be prevented by increased
calcium (1500 mg/ day) plus vitam in D (20 m g/ day).

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Factors promoting calcium
absorption
i) Vitamin D
ii) Parathyroid hormone
iii) Acidity
iv) Am ino acids
v) Lactose

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Factors inhibiting calcium absorption

1. Phytic acid
2. Ox alates
3. Malabsorption syndrome
4. Phosphate
5. Alkalinity

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Calcium: Biochemical Functions

1. Development of bones and teeth


2. Muscle contraction
3. Blood coagulation
4. Nerve im pulse transm ission
5. Activation of enzymes
6. Calcium as second messenger

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Calcium in Blood

i) Normal blood level


Norm al calcium level in plasm a 9–11 mg/ dl
ii) Ionised calcium
About 5 mg/ dl of calcium is in the ionised form and
is m etabolically active.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Different proportions of various forms 21

of circulating calcium

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Regulation of Blood Calcium Levels

There are effective controls to maintain the narrow


range (9–11 m g/ dl) of blood- calcium . The horm ones–
calcitriol, parathyroid hormone (PTH) and calcitonin
play a major role in blood calcium hom eostasis.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Vitamin D


Vitamin D and absorption of calcium

Vitamin D and bone

Vitamin D and renal tubules

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Parathyroid Hormone (PTH)


PTH on bones

PTH on kidney

PTH on intestine

Calcitonin

Calcitonin, calcitriol and PTH act together to
achieve calcium homeostasis

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Disease States

Hypercalcemia
Increased serum Ca level is associated with
hyperparathyroidism

Hypocalcemia
Hypocalcemia is m ostly due to hypoparathyroidism

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Phosphorus

Requirement and sources


The requirement of phosphorous is the same as of
calcium (1:1, that is 800 m g/ day). Milk is a good
source

Blood levels of phosphorus


Adults 3–4 m g/ dl
Children 5–6 m g/ dl

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Biochemical Functions of Phosphorous

1. Phosphorous helps in the form ation of bone and


teeth.

2. It serves as a com ponent of high- energy


phosphate com pounds such as ATP, GTP and
creatine phosphate.

3. In the synthesis of nucleotide coenzymes such as


NAD+ , NADP+ and PLP.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Magnesium

Dietary sources and requirements


Cereals, vegetables, nuts, fruits, m ilk and meat are good
sources.

An adult requires about 300 mg per day.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Biochemical functions of
magnesium
1. Mg 2+ serves as an essential cofactor for many
enzym es particularly those utilising ATP, e.g.,
hex okinase, phosphofructokinase, alkaline
phosphatase, adenyl cyclase and cAMP dependent
kinases.

2. Along with calcium and phosphate, magnesium is


utilised for bone and teeth form ation.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Sulphur

Sulphur mostly occurs in proteins as sulphur-


containing am ino acids (methionine and cysteine).

Biochemical functions
1. Sulphur as a component of iron–sulphur (Fe–S)
proteins plays a crucial role in mitochondrial
cellular respiration.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued)

2. The sulphur- containing amino acids are essential


components of many proteins. The disulphide
bonds involving sulphydryl groups stabilise the
protein structure.
3. The vitamins thiamine, biotin, lipoic acid and
coenzyme A of pantothenic acid contain sulphur.
The sulphydryl group (–SH) of coenzyme A plays a
crucial role in various metabolic reactions.
4. Keratin, the fibrous protein present in hair and
nails is rich in sulphur.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Iron

The total amount of iron in an adult body is 3 to 5 g.


About 75% of this occurs in the RBC as a constituent of
hemoglobin.

Dietary requirements
Adult male – 10 mg/ day
Menstruating wom an – 20 mg/ day
Pregnant and lactating wom en – 40 mg/ day

Dietary sources
Jaggery, organ meats (e.g. liver, heart), leafy
vegetables, pulses, cereals, apples, dry fruits and fish.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Absorption, Transport and Storage of Iron

Iron absorption, transport and storage

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Factors Affecting Iron Absorption

1. Acidity, ascorbic acid, alcohol, fructose and


cysteine promote iron absorption.
2. In iron deficiency anemia, Fe absorption is
increased and is almost ten times that of normal
absorption.
3. Amino acids and small peptides favour iron uptake
by mucosal cells.
4. Phytates (in cereals), ox alates (in leafy vegetables)
and tannins (in tea) inhibit Fe absorption by
forming insoluble iron salts.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Biochemical Functions of Iron

1. The major role of iron in humans is to carry O2 to


tissues and CO2 to lungs as part of heme protein
that in turn is part of hemoglobin. Ox ygen is also
bound by another iron- containing hem e protein in
m uscle, m yoglobin.
2. Iron plays a vital role in m itochondrial electron
transport (cellular respiration) as a component of
cytochrom es and iron–sulphur proteins.
3. Iron serves as a component of the enzyme
catalase in RBC which ex erts a antiox idant
role.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Iron: Disease States


Iron deficiency anemia

Hemosiderosis

Hemochromatosis

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Copper

Copper mostly distributed in the liver, brain, kidneys,


heart, bone, m uscle and hair.

Dietary sources and requirements


Organ meats, cereals, fruits, green leafy vegetables,
shellfish, poultry are sources of dietary copper.
Adults 2–3 mg/ day
Infants and children 0.5 –2 m g/ day

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Copper: Biochemical Functions

1. Copper serves as the metal cofactor for many enzymes.

2. As a com ponent of cytochrom e ox idase (complex IV of


ETC), it plays a role in cellular respiration.

3. As a constituent of superox ide dism utase and catalase,


it is involved in antiox idant function.
4. As a cofactor of ALA synthase (heme synthesis), it is
required for the formation of hem oglobin, m yoglobin
and cytochromes.

5. The hydrox ylation of lysine and proline (required for


collagen cross- linking) requires copper as an essential
cofactor.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Some important enzymes that 21

contain copper

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Copper: Disease States

Menke's kinky hair syndrome


It is an X- linked condition (affecting only male
infants). It is said to be due to m utations in the gene
for a copper - binding ATPase. As a result, copper
cannot be transported in the blood.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued)

Wilson’s disease
It is a genetic disease (autosom al recessive) which
occurs due to mutations similar to that of Menke's
disease but in a different gene (a gene encoding a
copper- binding ATPase ex pressed only in liver cells).
Hence, the condition is also known as hepatolenticular
degeneration.
Ceruloplasmin levels in blood are decreased .

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued)

Kayser–Fleischer ring

Patients of Wilson's disease are treated with lifelong


adm inistration of penicillamine and British antilewisite
(BAL) which chelate copper and are subsequently
ex creted in urine.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Iodine

Occurs in the thyroid gland.


Dietary sources
Seafoods and plant foods grown near the sea are the
best sources. Iodine content in the soil and water is
very low in high altitudes.
There are m any areas around the world, endemic for
iodine deficiency.
In all other areas, drinking water, vegetables and
fruits contain m oderate amounts of iodine.
Nowadays, iodised salt is used for cooking in most
households.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

Dietary requirements of iodine


Adults 100–150 mg/ day
Pregnant and lactating women 200 mg/ day


Protein- bound iodine (PBI)

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

Biochemical functions of iodine


Iodine is used for the synthesis of thyroid hormones
namely, thyrox ine (T4 ) and triiodothyronine (T3 ).

Disease states of iodine


Goitre (enlargement of thyroid gland). Hypothyroidism
and myx edem a occur in iodine deficiency. In children,
cretinism m ay occur.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Zinc

Most of it occurs in the prostate and salivary glands.


Dietary sources and requirements
Meat, fish, nuts, legumes, eggs and milk are good
sources of bioavailable zinc.
Adults 10–15 m g/ day
Pregnancy 20 mg/ day

(Continued…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued) Zinc

Biochemical functions
1. Zinc is an integral component of m any enzym es
(over 300 metalloenzymes) in the body, e.g.
carbonic anhydrase, alkaline phosphatase, alcohol
dehydrogenase.
2. It plays a crucial role in the synthesis and
stabilisation of DNA, RNA and proteins. It is an
integral component of DNA and RNA polym erases.
It forms zinc fingers.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued) Zinc

3. As a component of carbonic anhydrase, zinc plays


an important role in blood- gas transport and
renal regulation of pH.
4. Zinc is present in gusten, a salivary protein
im portant for the taste sensation.
5. It is required for norm al wound healing.
6. Zinc is required for normal sperm atogenesis.
7. It is required for embryonic development and fetal
growth.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Manganese

Biochemical functions
1. Mn serves as a cofactor for a number of enzymes,
e.g. pyruvate carbox ylase, hex okinase, superox ide
dism utase, glutamine synthetase, arginase.

2. Mn as a component of glycosyl transferases plays a


role in the synthesis of glycoproteins and
glycosam inoglycans.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued)
Manganese

Dietary sources and requirement


Nuts, cereals, leafy vegetables and fruits are good
sources. Tea leaves are high in Mn content. The
requirement is about 5 mg/ day.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Selenium

Biochemical functions
1. Selenium ex erts synergistic antiox idant function
along with vitamin E.
2. Selenium is a component of glutathione
perox idase.
3. As a constituent of iodothyronine deiodinase,
selenium is involved in the rem oval of iodine from
thyroid hormones.
4. Selenium is also a constituent of thioredox in
reductase

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued) Selenium

Dietary sources and requirements


Seafood, muscle meat and all kinds of cereals are rich
sources of selenium .
Dietary requirem ent is about 50–100 µg/ day.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Fluorine

Fluoride is popular for its role in the prevention of


dental caries. It is im portant for the m aintenance of
the structure of teeth and bone. But when present in
ex cess, it is potentially dangerous.
Biochemical functions
1. Fluoride increases the resistance of enamel to acid
attacks.
2. Fluoride is essential for the normal development of
bony structure.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

…Continued) Fluorine

Dietary sources
Drinking water is the m ain source of fluoride.

Disease states

Dental caries

Fluorosis

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21
Chromium

Biochemical functions
1. Chrom ium potentiates the action of insulin.
2. Com ponent of a functional complex termed glucose
tolerance factor (GTF).
3. Cr lowers cholesterol levels in blood.

Dietary sources, requirements and metabolism


Brewer's yeast, meat and wholegrains are good sources.
Safe intakes of Cr are 50–200 µg/ day for adults.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
21

COBALT
The only role of cobalt in the hum an body is as a
component of vitamin B12 .

MOLYBDENUM
Molybdenum is an essential cofactor of a number of
enzymes, in particular, x anthine ox idase which converts
the end products of purine metabolism to uric acid.
It participates in nitrogen fix ation reactions as a
component of nitrite reductase.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Section V
Nutrition

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
22

Chapter 2 2

Principles of Nutrition

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Humans derive their energy from food. Foods provide


both building m aterial and energy in the form of
nutrients to the body. Nutrients are substances that
are not synthesised in the body in sufficient amounts
and hence need be obtained through the diet.


Macronutrients

Micronutrients

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Calorific Value of Foods

Calorific value is the amount of heat energy generated


by burning 1 g of the food com pletely in the presence
of ox ygen.

Calorific values of major nutrients

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Respiratory Quotient (RQ)

Respiratory quotient is the ratio of the volum e of carbon


diox ide produced to the volume of ox ygen consumed
during the ox idation of food.
Carbohydrates: The volum e of carbon diox ide produced
is equal to the volume of ox ygen utilised when a
carbohydrate diet is consumed (RQ is 1).

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Lipids: The RQ of fats is relatively lower and is about


0.7

Proteins: The RQ of proteins cannot be m easured


directly. By indirect m ethods it is calculated to be
about 0.8.

Mixed diet: The RQ of a m ix ed diet is dependent upon


the relative proportions of carbohydrates, lipids and
proteins in it and in a well balanced diet, it is
approx imately around 0.8.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Energy Expenditure

For weight to remain stable, energy intake must match


energy output. Energy ex penditure in man is attributed
to the following processes that occur in the body.

1. Basal m etabolic rate


2. Specific dynam ic action
3.Physical activity

Apart from these three energy determ inants, certain


physiological conditions such as age, pregnancy,
lactation, convalescence and so on demand ex tra
supply of energy.
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities
Press
CHAPTER
22
Basal Metabolic Rate

BMR is defined as the minim um am ount of energy


required by the body to m aintain life at complete
physical and mental rest.

While determining the BMR, the person should be


awake and in a post- absorptive state.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Normal values of BMR



A healthy adult male has a BMR of about 35–38
Cal/ m 2 / h and adult female about 32–35 Cal/ m 2 / h.


More comm only, BMR is ex pressed as Cal/ day. For an
adult male, BMR is around 24 Cal/ kg body wt/ day
and for an adult fem ale, it is 22 Cal/ kg body wt/ day.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Factors Affecting BMR


Age

Gender

Body surface area

Built

Clim ate

Race

Physical activity and ex ercise

Starvation

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Factors affecting BMR


Fever

Hormones

Stress

Significance of BMR

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Specific Dynamic Action

The fact that the consumption of food is associated


with an ex penditure of energy is well established.
Utilisation of food is associated with the ex penditure of
energy resulting in increased heat production following
the ingestion of food.
This is known as specific dynamic action (SDA) or the
thermic effect of food.

Mechanism of SDA

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
SDA …Continued)

SDA for different foods


The SDA for carbohydrates is 5%, for lipids 15% and
for proteins, it is about 30%.
SDA for a m ix ed diet is taken at 10% of overall
calories.

Significance of SDA

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Physical Activity


Provided the BMR and SDA are more or less constant,
physical activity is highly variable in different
individuals.

Energy requirements in average adults are roughly as
follows (energy required for BMR, SDA and physical
activity).

Light work 2000–2500 Cal/ day

Moderate work 2500–3000 Cal/ day

Heavy work 3000–4000 Cal/ day

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Total Daily Energy Expenditure (TDEE)

The body functions by producing energy and utilising it.


Even at rest, our body uses energy.

The total daily energy expenditure (TDEE) is calculated to


find out how the body ex pends energy or burns calories.

To calculate the TDEE or the energy requirem ent in humans,


three factors are taken into consideration:

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
TDEE …Continued)

1 . Basal metabolic rate (BMR)


Also called resting metabolic rate (RMR), it is the
amount of energy the body uses during rest and is
approx im ately 60–70% of TDEE.
Three organs use m ost of the calories at rest. They
are the liver, brain and skeletal muscle, which
burn 2 7 , 2 0 and 1 8 per cent of the BMR
respectively .

2 . Specific dynamic action (SDA)


Also known as the thermic effect of food (TEF), it is the
energy the body uses to convert food into energy or to
move it to a location where it can be stored (as fat) for use
at later times. This accounts for about 10% of TDEE.
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

TDEE …Continued)

3 . Thermic effect of physical activity (TEPA)


It varies greatly in individuals, based on the duration,
intensity and the type of physical activity they indulge
in.

TEPA makes up about 15–30% (could go up to 50% during


heavy work) of TDEE.

Post- exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) is the


amount of energy the body burns after ex ercise to
return to its normal state. EPOC is considered as a part
of TEPA.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
TEPA Types

TEPA is of two types:

i.Planned ex ercise: It is the physical ex ercise undertaken in


a gymnasium or other sports- like activities. These activities
burn calories heavily.

ii. Non- ex ercise physical activities (NEPA): These are the


physical ex ertions that occur routinely in activities such as
standing up from a seated position and domestic work.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Calculation of calorie 22

expenditure in humans

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Non- exercise Activity Thermogenesis (NEAT)

Ex pendit ure of energy in NEPA


Non- ex ercise activity therm ogenesis Energy ex pendi-
(NEAT), also called as non- ex ercise ture (Cal/ h)

physical activity (NEPA), refers to the


energy ex pended in all routine
physical activities other than planned
gym ex ercises and sports activities.

The current practice of calculating the


daily energy requirem ents considers
NEAT as a significant contributor to
TDEE.

Daily energy requirement =


BMR + SDA + NEAT

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

NEAT . . . Continued)…

Usually, about 60-70% of calories are spent on BMR, 10-15%


towards SDA, and about 10-15% towards NEAT. In active
domestic workers, NEAT may go up to 50%.

Thus, NEAT plays a vital role in keeping the body fit and healthy.

Impairment in NEAT significantly contributes to obesity. This can


be observed from the fact that obesity is less common in active
homemakers and domestic helpers.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Nutritional Importance of Carbohydrates

Dietary carbohydrates are major sources of energy.


Carbohydrates

Provide 50%–60% of the total calories.

Energy content of carbohydrates


The energy content of dietary carbohydrate is
approx im ately 4 Cal/ g.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Dietary sources of
carbohydrates
1. Digestible carbohydrates
They are the chief energy sources of the
body. E.g. starch, glycogen, sucrose,
lactose, glucose, fructose.
2. Non- digestible carbohydrates
Also known as dietary fibre. Though they
are non- calorigenic they ex ert certain
beneficial effects in the body, e.g. cellulose,
hemicellulose, pectins, gum s.
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)

Common sources of digestible carbohydrates


include

Cereals (rice, wheat) (60%–80%)


Pulses (50%–60%)
Roots and tubers (20%–40%)
Bread (50%–60%)
Meat (40%–50%)
Vegetables and fruits (30%–50%)
Table sugar (100%), honey (80%)
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)

Sources of carbohydrates

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Dietary Fibre

Certain non- starch polysaccharides are resistant to


digestion by enzymes of the human small intestine
and are popularly known as dietary fibre.

Role of fibre in the body


1. Function on GIT
2. Beneficial in preventing cancers
3. In diabetes m ellitus
4. Hypolipidemic effect
5. Effect on obesity
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued

Sources of dietary fibre


Leafy vegetables, fruits, other vegetables, legumes and
rice bran are rich sources of fibre.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Glycemic Index (GI)

It is a nutritional measure of different carbohydrate


foods on blood glucose levels. Glycemic index of a food
item refers to the extent of the rise of blood glucose
following its intake.

Glycemic index is measured by performing the glucose


tolerance test (GTT) after ingesting the food item to
be assessed and comparing it with a reference meal.
The reference meal is usually taken as 50 g of
glucose.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Glycemic Index (GI)

Glycemic index is defined as the incremental area


under the GTT curve after eating 50 g of the test
meal (food item to be assessed) compared to the
incremental area of the GTT curve with an equal
quantity of the reference meal (50 g glucose).

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Glycemic Index (GI)

Glycemc index curve


(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Glycemic Index (GI)
…Continued)

Glycemic index of some common foods

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)
Glycemic index

Significance of Glycemic Index


1. Foods that digest quickly after ingestion and release
glucose rapidly into the blood have a high GI. These
foods with high GI speedily contribute to an
increase in blood sugar levels.

Foods with high glycemic index (GI > 70) include white
bread, table sugar (sucrose), all tubers (e.g.,
potatoes), polished rice, free glucose and maltose
powders, etc.

Note that most of the foods with high GI contain refined


sugars. (Cont inues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)
Glycemic index

2. Foods that digest slowly after ingestion and hence


release glucose slowly into the blood have a low GI
and contribute to blood glucose levels in tandem
with the insulin release.
This is because the digestion and absorption of
complex (raw) carbohydrates is slow because of the
large amounts of fibre in them and contribute to an
increase in blood sugar only slowly.
For ex ample, the GI of a complex carbohydrate (starch)
is lower than that of a refined carbohydrate
(glucose). Foods with low GIs include vegetables
and legumes, fruits, milk, whole grain cereals
(e.g., brown rice), ice cream, etc.
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Glycemic index

3. When carbohydrates occur in the combined


form with fibre, fats and protein, the glycemic
index is low because of the delay in digestion
and absorption.
Ice cream has a low GI despite its high sugar
content because it also contains fat, which delays
its absorption.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Glycemic Index - Clinical Significance

Glycemic index is a useful tool for form ulating


therapeutic diets for diabetic patients.
Foods with low glycem ic index prevent a steep
rise in blood sugar concentration after a meal
and are hence preferred.
Such foods also tend to potentiate the insulin
sensitivity of tissues.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Nutritional Importance of Fats and Lipids

Sources of dietary lipids


Food item s such as butter, ghee, various vegetable oils
and fish oils, m ilk and m ilk products, egg, meat,
pulses and cereals are the dietary sources of fats and
lipids.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Composition of oils and fats

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Essential Fatty Acids

Linoleic acid and linolenic acid are considered to be


two essential fatty acids (EFA) because neither can be
synthesised in the human body.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Cholesterol and Heart Disease


Cereals, pulses and vegetables do not contain
cholesterol, which is obtained only from foods of
animal origin. It is well known that high
cholesterol levels (> 240 m g/ dl) are associated
with increased risk of coronary artery disease.

In norm al individuals, the cholesterol level in the
blood ranges between 150–200 mg/ dl (desirable
< 180 m g/ dl).

(Continued…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continues) Cholesterol and heart disease

Cholesterol content of various foods of animal


origin

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Nutritional Importance of Proteins

Essential am ino acids


Amino acids and their nutritional requirements

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Nitrogen Balance


Negatie nitrogen balance

Positive nitrogen balance

Nitrogen balance in the body

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Nutritional Value of Proteins

Dietary sources of proteins


Meat, eggs, fish, m ilk are good sources of protein.
Legum es, beans, peanuts, peas, soyabean are the best
plant sources.
How much protein do we need?
The recom mended dietary allowance (RDA) is 0.75 g/ kg
body weight/ day is sufficient for a norm al adult.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

Common dietary sources and their protein content

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Biological Value (BV)

Biological value is the ratio of the am ount of nitrogen


retained in the body and nitrogen absorbed.

Though BV is a widely used index to ex press the


nutritional value of proteins, it has certain inherent
defects. It does not take into account the nitrogen which
is lost during digestion and hence it may not provide an
accurate nutritional assessm ent of proteins.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Net Protein Utilisation (NPU)

This is a better nutritional index com pared to BV as it


takes into account the factor of digestion. It is the ratio
between the nitrogen retained in the body to total
nitrogen ingested .

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Protein Efficiency Ratio (PER)

The quality of a protein can be determined by its ability


to produce growth. It is the assessm ent of weight gain
per gram of protein taken. PER is the m easurement of
the ability of a protein to prom ote growth in an animal.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Balanced Diet

A balanced diet is com posed of a variety of foods


which contain all the essential nutrients such as
carbohydrates, fats, proteins and micronutrients in the
right proportions

A mix ed diet for an


average adult
(weighing 60 kg)

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Principles of prescribing a diet


Calorie requirem ent has to be assessed based on
age, gender, build, health status and physical
activity.


Protein requirem ent has to be assessed based on
age, gender, build, health status and physical
activity.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Principles of prescribing a diet


Protein requirement can be calculated as
0.8 g/ kg body weight/ day. During growing age,
pregnancy and lactation it can be m ore than 2 g/ kg
body wt. Protein can be obtained as anim al protein
or m ix ed vegetable protein. The calorie yield from a
protein diet should be 10%–15% of total calorie
requirem ents.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Principles of prescribing a diet


Fats can provide 20%–25% of total calorie requirem ents
of the individual. Visible (fats and oils) should be
restricted to not m ore than 20 g/ day for a healthy
adult.

However, in various physiological states it can be


enhanced, such as growing children (25 g), pregnant
women (30 g) lactating mothers (45 g). It is advisable
that obese individuals, old people and persons at risk
of cardiovascular disease restrict fat content to less
than 20 g a day. Different vegetable oils can be used to
balance the composition of SFA, MUFA and PUFA to
1:1:1.
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Principles of prescribing a diet


Choose a diet with plenty of whole grains,
vegetables and fruits and green leafy foods which
contain both digestible carbohydrates and dietary
fibre. Ideally 55%–65% of calories can be obtained
from carbohydrate diet.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Food Guide Pyramid

Food pyramid : A
guide to
balanced diet

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Dietary Guidelines during Pregnancy

What a pregnant woman eats or drinks during


pregnancy forms her baby’s main source of nutrition.
Hence, it is essential that her diet contain a variety of
foods that provide the required nourishm ent for the
baby’s optim um growth and developm ent.

It should be noted that all the regular nutrients of


an adult have to be supplied in increased
quantities, as pregnancy makes additional
demands on the same for the baby’s growth—
especially more protein, calcium, iron and folic acid.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

…Continued) Dietary guidelines during pregnancy

Protein: Since protein is considered a ‘builder


nutrient’, adequate amounts of protein are needed
during pregnancy. Food sources rich in proteins
include meat, poultry, fish, eggs, nuts, dried beans
and peas.

Calcium: This m ineral is crucial to build a baby’s


bones and teeth. If a pregnant woman does not
consume enough calcium, the mineral will be drawn
from her bones to meet the extra demands of
pregnancy.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

…Continued) Dietary guidelines during pregnancy

Nowadays, many dairy products are fortified with


vitamin D, another essential nutrient that works with
calcium to develop the baby’s bone and teeth.

Pregnant wom en need to consum e about 1 ,2 0 0 - 1 ,5 0 0


mg of calcium daily.

Food sources include milk, yogurt, cheese, fish (eaten


with bones), leafy vegetables, eggs and other calcium-
fortified foods.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)
Dietary guidelines during pregnancy

Iron: Pregnant women need up to 4 0 mg of iron per day,


which is almost double the amount needed normally. This
is essential to m aintain an optim um supply of ox ygenated
blood to the baby.

Insufficient intake of iron during pregnancy can lead to


anem ia, which increases the risk of infections during
pregnancy.

Foods rich in vitamin C, e.g., orange juice, when consumed


with iron- rich foods, increases the absorption of iron.

Food sources for dietary iron include jaggery, meat, poultry,


fish, leafy vegetables, peas, dry fruits and iron- fortified
cereals. (Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued)
Dietary guidelines during pregnancy

Folic acid: The B- com plex vitamin folate is known to


prevent birth defects in the baby’s brain and spinal
cord (neural tube defects).

It has been observed that the diet alone is not always


able to provide the required folate. Hence, a daily
folate supplement of 400 m icrogram s is
recom mended during pregnancy.

Food sources include green leafy vegetables, beans,


fruits, fortified cereals, eggs and dairy products.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
Dietary Guidelines in Coronary Artery 22

Disease (CAD)
• Limit the cholesterol in the diet to less than 200 mg per
day.
• Take adequate amounts of PUFA. They are required for
the esterification of cholesterol and its subsequent
rem oval. ω - 3 fatty acids reduce LDL- C levels.
• Restrict the saturated fats and trans- unsaturated fatty
acids to less than 10% of the total calorie intake. Ex cess
consumption of these tends to interfere with the
lipoprotein metabolism. They increase the levels of
LDL- C and decrease HDL- C. They also reduce
mem brane fluidity.
(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22

…Continued) Dietary guidelines in coronary artery disease (CAD)

• Restrict the overall intake of fat to no more than 20%


of the total energy intake.

• Add good am ounts of fibre in the diet. They increase


the reabsorption of bile salts and decrease the
absorption of dietary cholesterol.

• Restrict the consumption of refined carbohydrates and


sucrose. Sucrose steeply raises the TAG levels. Refined
carbohydrates, when consumed in ex cess, are easily
converted to fats and stored.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Dietary guidelines in coronary artery disease (CAD)

• Consum e sufficient am ounts of vitamin C, E and beta


carotene. These are natural antiox idants that prevent
the formation of ox idised LDL. Low dietary intake of
folate, B12 and B6 elevates homocysteine
concentrations, which is dangerous.

• A m oderate intake of alcohol (2–4 units a day) offers


some protection from coronary artery disease. However,
restricting the intake of alcohol to moderate amounts is
easier said than done. Heavy drinking can lead to
diseases of the heart m uscle, called cardiomyopathy,
besides m any other health problems.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Diabetic Diet

Doctors are frequently called upon to give dietary advice


to diabetic patients. The aim of the diet is to keep the
blood glucose level as close to normal values as
possible. To achieve this, certain dietary guidelines
have to be followed by the patient.

• Refined carbohydrates, sweets, sugar are to be


avoided.

• Foods with a low glycemic index are to be chosen so


that elevation in blood glucose level is not rapid.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Diabetic Diet

• Frequent, sm all meals are recommended with a proper


distribution of calories.

• Roots and tubers should be restricted. Leafy vegetables


can be taken liberally as they contain large am ount of
dietary fibre.

• The intake of cholesterol- rich foods should be reduced.


PUFA should constitute about one- third of the total fat
intake.

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Obesity

Obesity is the term used to describe individuals with


ex cess body fat. Ex cess calorie intake coupled with the
lack of sufficient physical activity results in obesity.

Body mass index (BMI): It is used to assess the degree of


by taking the weight of a person (in kg) and
dividing it by the person’s height squared (in m 2 ) .

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) Obesity

Obesity is the result of the ingestion of food in excess of the


body’s needs.

It could occur during childhood (juvenile-onset) or in adults.

In juvenile-onset obesity, there is an increase in both the


number and size of the adipocytes, whereas in adult
obesity, fat is accumulated only in already existing
adipocytes.

A certain degree of genetic predisposition exists in the


development of obesity (if one of the parents is obese, there
is a 50% chance of their wards becoming obese)

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
Protein- Energy Malnutrition (PEM)

PEM is m ostly seen in young children due to


malnutrition. The clinical picture of PEM is manifested
in two forms.
1. Kwashiorkor; 2. Marasmus
Kwashiorkor
Kwashiorkor represents protein malnutrition in children
characterised by edema.
Marasmus
Marasmus is the result of severe m alnutrition in infants
characterised by severe m uscle wasting.

(Continues…

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
22
…Continued) PEM

Comparison between kwashiorkor and marasmus

Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities


Press
CHAPTER
23

Section VI
Clinical Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23

Chapter 2 3

Water and Electrolytes

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Water


Role of water

Distribution of water in the body

Water balance

Water input

Water output

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Distribution of Water in the Body

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Water Balance in Humans

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Electrolytes – Distribution and Balance


Electrolytes are well distributed in body fluids to
maintain osmotic equilibrium and water balance.
Na+ is the principal cation of ECF, while K+ is the
chief cation of ICF.

Osmolarity: Osmotic pressure ex erted by the
num ber of m oles per litre of solution.

Osmolality: Osmotic pressure ex erted by the
num ber of m oles per kg of solvent. Osm olality is
more comm only used than osmolarity in clinical
practice.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued Electrolytes – distribution and
balance

Composition of electrolytes in body fluid compartments (mEq/ L)

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued) Electrolytes – distribution and
balance

Osmolality of plasm a: The osmolality of plasm a is in


the range of 280–300 milliosm oles/ kg.

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued)

Constituents contributing to plasma osmolality

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued)


Regulation of water and electrolyte balance

Aldosterone

Anti- diuretic hormone (ADH)

Renin- Angiotension system

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Dehydration

Causes of dehydration
Dehydration m ay occur as a sequel to diarrhea,
vom iting, ex cessive sweating, fluid loss in burns,
adrenocortical dysfunction, kidney diseases (e.g. renal
insufficiency), deficiency of ADH (diabetes insipidus).

Features of dehydration
The clinical m anifestations of severe dehydration include
increased pulse rate, low blood pressure, sunken
eyeballs, decreased skin turgor, lethargy, confusion and
eventually coma.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Treatment of Dehydration


Intake of plenty of water is a simple and effective
method of treating dehydration. In persons who
cannot ingest it orally, water can be given via a
nasogastric tube.


If this is not possible, water should be given
intravenously (IV) in an isotonic solution, usually as
5% glucose (5% dex trose). If there is an associated
electrolyte depletion, dex trose- saline (4% dex trose,
0.18% NaCl) should be given intravenously.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Treatment of dehydration
…Continued)


When sodium depletion alone is the problem , giving
intravenous isotonic fluid – normal saline (0.9% NaCl)
or plasma ex panders or album in is the first line of
managem ent of salt deficit.

After restoring the intravascular volume, the
underlying cause m ust be treated.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23

…Continued) Treatment of dehydration

Oral Rehydration Therapy (ORT)


Oral rehydration therapy is used to treat acute
diarrheas due to all etiologies and in all age groups.
The aim of oral fluid therapy is to prevent dehydration
and reduce m ortality.

Glucose and salts (electrolytes) in water are the


ingredients of oral rehydration solutions (ORS)
commonly used.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued)
Oral Rehydration Therapy (ORT)

It is a sim ple mix ture made of table salt (one level


teaspoon) and sugar (6 level teaspoons) dissolved in
one litre of drinking water. The solution should be
made freshly daily and used within 24 hours. It should
not be boiled or otherwise sterilized. These simple
home- made ORS are life- saving in cases of acute
dehydration.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Electrolytes - Sodium

Sodium is the principal cation of the ex tracellular


fluid.

Dietary sources
Comm on salt (NaCl) used in cooking medium is the
major source of sodium. Whole grains, nuts, eggs,
leafy vegetables, milk and bread are good sources of
Na+ .

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued) Electrolytes - Sodium

Dietary requirements
The recom mended dietary allowance (RDA) of sodium
is about 5–10 g/ day.

Sodium in ECF: The normal concentration of sodium in


plasm a is 135–145 m Eq/ L.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued) Electrolytes - Sodium

Biochemical functions
1 . Sodium regulates the body's acid–base balance
along with chloride and bicarbonate. It is involved in
forming a bicarbonate buffer system (NaHCO3 –
H2 CO3 ) and a phosphate buffer system (NaH 2 PO4 –
Na2 HPO4 ). These buffer systems play an im portant
role in the acid–base balance.

2. Sodium plays a role in maintaining osmotic pressure


and fluid balance.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued) Electrolytes - Sodium

3. Sodium is important in muscle ex citability and is


necessary for initiating and maintaining the
heartbeat.

4. Sodium plays a role in cell permeability.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Diseases States

Hyponatremia
When the plasma sodium level falls below normal, the
condition is referred to as hyponatrem ia. The causes
include

1. Vomitting
2. Diarrhea
3. Burns
4. Addison's disease (adrenocortical insufficiency)
5. Renal tubular acidosis (tubular reabsorption of
sodium is defective)
6. Severe sweating

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23

…Continued)

Hypernatremia
This condition is marked by an elevation in the plasm a
sodium level.

Causes of hypernatremia include:

1. Cushing's syndrom e (adrenocortical hyperactivity)


2. Prolonged cortisone therapy
3. Pregnancy (steroid hormones cause sodium
retention in the body to som e ex tent)
4. Dehydration (when water is lost, the blood volume
is decreased with apparent increase in the
concentration of sodium)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Potassium

Potassium is the m ajor intracellular cation.

Dietary sources: Banana, orange, pineapple, potato,


beans, chicken and organ meat (liver) are good sources
and coconut water has very high content of potassium.

RDA: About 3–4 g/ day.

Potassium in the ECF and ICF: The plasma


concentration of potassium is 3.5–5.0 mEq/ L.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Biochemical Functions of Potassium

1. Potassium maintains intracellular osmotic pressure.


Movem ent of water across the biological m embranes
is dependent on the osmotic pressure differences
between ICF and ECF. In a healthy state, the osmotic
pressure of ECF (mainly due to Na+ ions) is equal to
the osmotic pressure of ICF (contributed by K+ ions).
As such, there is no net passage of water molecules
in or out of the cells maintaining osm otic
equilibrium.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued) Biochemical functions of potassium

2. It plays a role in the regulation of acid –base and


water balances in the cells.

3. The enzyme, pyruvate kinase (glycolysis) is


dependent on K+ for its optimal activity.

4. Potassium is required for the transmission of nerve


impulses.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
Disease States

Hypokalemia
Hypokalem ia is manifested as muscular weakness,
impaired m yocardial contractility leading to cardiac
arrhythmias and even cardiac arrest.

Hypokalem ia is observed in hyperactivity of the adrenal


cortex (Cushing's syndrom e).

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
23
…Continued)

Hyperkalemia
Hyperkalem ia, leads to ventricular arrhythmia,
ventricular fibrillation, bradycardia and m ay lead to
cardiac arrest .

Decreased potassium ex cretion can occur in


mineralocorticoid deficiency (Addison's disease) and by
potassium- sparing diuretics.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4thEdition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24

Section VI
Clinical Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24

Chapter 2 4

Acid- Base Balance

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Source of Hydrogen Ion 24

Gains and Losses

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Hydrogen Ion Homeostasis

There are three lines of defence operative in


maintaining blood pH.

I. Buffer system s
II. Respiratory m echanism
III. Renal regulation

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Buffer Systems


Buffers are the solutions which resist change in pH
on the addition of sm all amounts of acids or bases.
Any substance that can reversibly bind hydrogen
ions can be labelled as a buffer.


Buffers can neither remove H + ions from the body
nor add them to it. They can only keep H + ions in a
temporarily suspended form. The H + ions have to be
ultimately eliminated by the kidneys.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Major Buffer Systems

There are three m ajor buffer systems operative in


the human body.

1. Bicarbonate buffer

2. Phosphate buffer

3. Protein buffer

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24

Bicarbonate Buffer

 Bicarbonate and carbonic acid pair (NaHCO3 – H2 CO3 )


is the predominant buffer system in the ex tracellular
fluid.


The concentration of the bicarbonate ion is not
directly m easured; it is calculated from the
Henderson–Hasselbalch equation.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Handerson–Hasselbalch Equation

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 24

This equation is known as


the Henderson–
Hasselbalch equation
and is applicable for any
buffer pair.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 24

The concentration of H2 CO3 = 40 × 0.03 = 1.2 mmol/ L.

The Henderson–Hasselbalch equation for the bicarbonate


buffer pair is

Substituting the values (plasma pH = 7.4; pKa for H 2 CO3 = 6.1;


HCO3 – = 24 mmol/ L; H2 CO3 = 1.2 mmol/ L), we can see that

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 24

From this, it is seen that the concentration of bicarbonate is


almost 20 times more than that of carbonic acid in the
blood.

This is referred to as the alkali reserve, and it is essential


for meeting the challenge of buffering the H + ions
generated from the huge body acid–load.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Respiratory Regulation of pH

The respiratory system and the kidneys together


maintain the body pH. The respiratory response to
the altered plasma pH is very swift (within minutes)
compared to the slow but steady response of the
kidneys (hours to days).

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Chloride Shift

Generation of bicarbonate by the erythrocytes

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24

Renal Regulation of pH

The basic mechanisms of renal regulation of pH


include:

1. Reabsorption of bicarbonate

2. Addition of new bicarbonate to the plasma

3. Ex cretion of amm onium ions

4. Ex cretion of free H+ ions.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Reabsorption of Bicarbonate

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Addition of New Bicarbonate to 24

the Plasma

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Excretion of Ammonium Ions

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Excretion of Free H + Ions

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Clinical Causes and Biochemical 24

Mechanisms of Acid- Base Disorders

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Anion Gap

The difference between the sums of the concentrations


of the measured cations (Na+ and K+ ) and that of
measured anions (C1 – and HCO3 –) is known as the anion
gap.

Thus, the anion gap represents unmeasured anions in


the plasma. It can be calculated as:

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 24

The anion gap in normal health is about 12 –18 mEq/ L.

The alterations in the anion gap are useful in the


clinical assessm ent of acid–base disorders.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Acid- Base Disorders

Metabolic acidosis
The primary abnormalities in m etabolic acidosis are:

Increased production or decreased ex cretion of H +
ions or both at once.
 Loss of HCO3 – from the body

Causes of metabolic acidosis



Severe uncontrolled diabetes mellitus

Diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA).

Starvation ketosis, lactic acidosis and renal failure
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
…Continued)

Management
Metabolic acidosis can be effectively m anaged by
identifying and treating the underlying cause. This
includes treatm ent of diabetes, control of diarrhea,
correction of shock and so on.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Metabolic Alkalosis

The primary abnorm ality in metabolic alkalosis is an


increase in plasma HCO3 – concentration with a
consequent reduction in H + ion.
Causes

Sustained vom iting

Bicarbonate administration for prolonged periods as
a m eans of treating indigestion and overuse of
antacids for treatment of dyspepsia result in
metabolic alkalosis.

Overdose of diuretic drugs

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
…Continued)


Mineralocorticoid ex cess (Cushing's syndrome,
Conn's syndrome), alkalosis occurs due to increased
H+ ion ex cretion in the urine


Principles of management include correcting the
underlying cause, adequate intravenous fluid
administration and replacem ent of K+ correcting
hypokalem ia.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Respiratory Acidosis

The primary abnorm ality in respiratory acidosis is


retention of CO2 ( H2 CO3 ) due to im paired alveolar
ventilation resulting in a rise in pCO2 .

Causes
• Airway obstruction and pulm onary disease – chronic
obstructive airway disease (emphysema, bronchitis
and so on)
– severe asthma
– bronchopneumonia
– respiratory distress syndrom e (RDS)
– flail chest
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued 24

- Depression of the respiratory centre by the


administration of overdose of anesthetics,
sedatives and narcotics.

- Neurom uscular diseases like poliomyelitis,


Guillian–Barre syndrome, motor neuron disease
and so on.
Management involves correction of causative
factors. The general principle of treating
respiratory acidosis is to improve alveolar
ventilation and lower pCO2 .

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
Respiratory Alkalosis

The prim ary abnormality in respiratory alkalosis is a


decrease in H2CO3 concentration. A fall in pCO2,
reduces the ratio of carbonic acid to bicarbonate
resulting in acidosis.
Causes
• Hyperventilation resulting from hysteria and anx iety
states cause respiratory alkalosis.

Raised intracranial pressure and brain stem lesions
cause hyperventilation by stim ulating the
respiratory centre. Ingestion of certain drugs
(salicylates) also stimulates the brain stem
respiratory centre.
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
24
…Continued)


Hypox ia occurring in high altitudes, severe anaem ic
conditions and pulmonary disease

Principles of management include


correcting the underlying causes, alleviating
anx iety. In acute cases, the patient is
subjected to re- breathing into a closed bag
to allow CO2 levels to rise.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Acid–base disorders with primary 24

changes and compensatory


mechanisms

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

Section VI
Clinical Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

Chapter 2 5

Organ Function Tests

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Liver Function Tests
Major Functions of the Liver

1 .Metabolic function

Carbohydrate metabolism: Glycolysis, glycogen synthesis,


breakdown, gluconeogenesis and HMP shunt.

Lipid metabolism: Fatty acid synthesis, ketogenesis,


cholesterol synthesis and ex cretion, bile acid synthesis, 25-
hydrox ylation of vitam in D and lipoprotein synthesis.

Protein metabolism: Urea synthesis from am m onia, synthesis


of plasm a proteins (barring im m unoglobulins) and synthesis of
som e coagulation factors.

Hormone metabolism: Metabolism and ex cretion of steroid


horm ones and m etabolism of peptide horm ones. (Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
…Continued) 25

2 . Synthesis function
Synthesis of plasm a proteins, clotting factors, cholesterol,
TAG and lipoproteins.

3 . Excretory function
Ex cretion of bile pigm ents and bile salts into the bile.

4 . Detoxification
Am m onia is detox ified to urea; drugs and other x enobiotics
are detox ified and ex creted.

5 . Regulation of blood glucose levels


By hepatic glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis.

6 . Storage function
Glycogen, vitam ins A, D, K, B12 and iron.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Classification of Liver Function Tests

A. Biochemical classification

I. Tests based on liver excretory function

i. Serum- bilirubin: Total, conjugated and


unconjugated

ii. Urine: Bile pigm ents, bile salts and urobilinogen

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued

II. Liver enzymes


i. Alanine am inotransferase (ALT)
ii. Aspartate am inotransferase (AST)
iii. Alkaline phosphatase (ALP)
iv. Gamm a glutamyl transpeptidase (GGT)

III. Tests for synthesis function of liver


i. Total proteins
ii. Serum albumin, globulins, A/ G ratio
iii. Prothrom bin tim e

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

…Continued

IV. Special tests


i. Ceruloplasmin
ii. Ferritin
iii. 1 - Antitrypsin
iv. - Fetoprotein

(Continues

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued

B. Clinical classification
I. Markers of liver dysfunction
i. Serum bilirubin: Total, conjugated
ii. Urine: Bile pigments, bile salts and
urobilinogen
iii. Total protein, serum albumin and
A/ G ratio
iv. Prothrom bin tim e
v. Blood ammonia

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued

II. Markers of hepatocellular injury


i. Alanine aminotransferase (ALT)
ii. Aspartate aminotransferase (AST)

III. Markers of cholestasis (obstruction to the flow


of bile)
i. Alkaline phosphatase (ALP)
ii. Gamma glutam yl transpeptidase (GGT)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Bilirubin

Serum bilirubin
Norm al serum bilirubin level varies from 0.2 to 1.0
mg/ dl. Of this, the unconjugated bilirubin (bilirubin –
albumin complex ) varies from 0.2 to 0.4 mg/ dl and
conjugated bilirubin varies from 0.2 to 0.6 m g/ dl.

Van den Bergh reaction


Jaundice is the m ost com mon characteristic clinical
manifestation occurring due to fluctuations in serum
bilirubin.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued

There are three types of jaundice

1. Hemolytic jaundice (pre- hepatic jaundice)

2. Obstructive jaundice (post- hepatic jaundice)

3. Hepatic jaundice (intra- hepatic jaundice)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Causes of Different Types of Jaundice

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
Tests for the differential
CHAPTER
25

diagnosis of jaundice

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Metabolic Function


Galactose tolerance test

Plasma amino acid test

Anti- pyrine breath tests

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Synthesis Function


Serum albumin

Ceruloplasmin

A1- Antitrypsin

Haptoglobin

A2- Macroglobin

Transferrin

A- Fetoprotein

Prothrom bin tim e (PT)

Electrophoretic separation of plasma proteins

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Tests Based on Enzyme Estimations

Aminotransferases or transaminases

alanine aminotransferase (ALT)

aspartate aminotransferase (AST)

The levels of aminotransferases in serum are elevated in


all liver diseases. The normal concentrations of ALT and
AST in plasma are 10–35 IU/ L and 8–20 IU/ L respectively

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

…Continued

Alkaline phosphatase (ALP)


Bile duct obstruction induces the synthesis of ALP by
biliary tract epithelial cells. Hence, high levels of ALP
(normal 3–13 KA units/ dl) indicate
obstructive/ posthepatic jaundice.
Gamma glutamyl transpeptidase (GGT)
Elevated levels of GGT are associated with chronic
alcoholism . Its levels are also increased (norm al 5–40
IU/ L) in biliary obstruction, pancreatic disease and
chronic obstructive pulm onary disease (COPD) Its
activity is usually parallels to that of ALP.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

…Continued)

Nucleotidase
The activity of 5'- nucleotidase (norm al 2 –15 IU/ L) is
elevated in obstructive liver disease

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Tests Based on Detoxification Function

Blood Ammonia Test


Blood amm onia estim ation serves as an index of urea
synthesis by the liver. Raised am monia in the plasma is
suggestive of cirrhosis. Arterial blood should be used for
blood amm onia estim ation. Estim ation of am monia is
used to ex clude or diagnose hepatic failure in patients
with unex plained stupor or coma. In neonates with
suspected urea cycle disorders, amm onia estim ation is
indicated.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Renal Function Tests

Diagrammatic representation of a brief summ ary of nephron function


Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Classification of Renal Function Tests

Kidney function tests m ay be divided into four groups.


I. Tests to assess glomerular function
All the clearance tests (creatinine, urea and so on) are
useful in measuring the glomerular filtration rate
(GFR). Measuring the proteinuria reflects glom erular
perm eability.
II. Tests to assess tubular function
Urine concentration and dilution tests, urine
acidification test and secretion tests are used to tex t
tubular function.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

…Continued

III. Analysis of blood/ serum


Estimation of blood urea, serum creatinine, protein
and electrolytes are often used to assess renal
function.
IV. Complete urine analysis
Ex am ination of urine for volume, pH, specific gravity,
osmolality and presence of any abnormal constituents
is also useful to assess the kidney function.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Creatinine Clearance Test

Creatinine clearance m ay be defined as the volum e of


plasm a that would be com pletely cleared of creatinine
per m inute.

U = Urine concentration of creatinine


V = Urine output in ml/ min
(24- hour urine volume divided by 24 × 60)
P = Plasm a concentration of creatinine

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued

Reference volumes: The norm al range of creatinine


clearance is about 120–145 m l/ min.

Diagnostic application: A decrease in creatinine


clearance (< 75% normal) indicates a decreased GFR
reflecting renal dam age.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Estimated GFR (eGFR)

An indirect and much sim pler method of estim ating


creatinine clearance (and thereby GFR) is by using
serum creatinine level. It is called as eGFR, and a
formula known as the Cockcroft- Gault equation is
em ployed to estim ate it.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25

…Continued

The factor 0.85 is used to estimate the creatinine


clearance in fem ales based on the estim ation that they
have 15% less muscle m ass compared to m ales. eGFR
is particularly used in patients of chronic kidney
disease.

Creatinine coefficient: It is the amount of creatinine


and creatine put together ex creted in mg/ kg body
weight.
Normal range Males: 20- 28 m g/ kg
Females: 15- 22 mg/ kg

Its value is elevated in muscular dystrophy.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Urea Clearance Test

Urea clearance is defined as the volum e of plasma that


would be completely cleared of urea per m inute. It is
calculated by:

Cm = Max imum urea clearance


U = Urea concentration in urine (mg/ dL)
V = Urine ex creted per minute in mL
P = Urea concentration in plasm a (m g/ mL)

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
…Continued)

The above calculation is applicable when the output of


urine is m ore than 2 m L per minute. This is referred to
as m ax imum urea clearance (Cm ) , and the norm al
value is about 75 mL/ min.
Diagnostic interpretation: A urea clearance value below
75% normal indicates renal damage.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Inulin Clearance Test

Inulin clearance (Cin ) is calculated by:

Uin = Urine concentration of inulin


V = Urine output in m L/ min
Pin = Plasm a concentration of inulin

Diagnostic importance: The norm al inulin clearance


rate is 125 ml/ min. A comparison of the clearance of
a given substance with the clearance of inulin
provides information about the renal transport
processes.
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Tests for Tubular Function

• Specific gravity and osmolality of urin


• Urine concentration test
• Urine dilution test

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Analysis of Blood/ Serum

Estimation of blood urea (15–40 mg/ dl) and serum


creatinine (0.7–1.5 m g/ dl) are prescribed to assess
the kidney function. Serum creatinine is more
sensitive than blood urea

Complete urine analysis


Physical ex am ination, chemical analysis and analysis
for abnorm al constituents in urine provide clues
about the status of renal function.

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Gastric Function Tests


Fractional test meal (FTM)

Pentagastrin stimulation test

Augm ented histam ine test

Alcohol test meal

Tubeless gastric analysis

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
25
Pancreatic Function Tests


Measurement of pancreatic enzymes

Secretin–cholecystokinin test

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

Section VI
Clinical Biochemistry

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

Chapter 2 6

Biochemistry of Cancer

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Etiology of Cancer

I. Predisposing factors

Age

Heredity

Environmental factors
– Lifestyle
– Diet
– Occupation
– Iatrogenic

Acquired pre- cancerous disorders

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Carcinogenic Agents

Carcinogens that cause cancer can be divided into


three broad groups.

Physical: Radiant energy

Chemical: A large variety of chemical com pounds

Biological: Oncogenic viruses

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Radiant Energy

Radiations can cause cancer mainly in two ways.

i) Direct effect:
Radiation dam ages DNA by events such as single or
double strand breaks, elim ination of
purine/ pyrimidine bases, cross linking of strands
and formation of pyrim idine dim ers.
By inflicting injuries by the above m echanisms,
radiations like X- rays, - rays, UV- rays harm to the
DNA and are m utagenic.

(Continues

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
…Continued

ii) Indirect effect: Ex cessive radiation by - rays and X-


rays produce free radicals (reactive ox ygen species)
which interact subsequently with DNA and other
m acromolecules in the cells causing molecular
dam age

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Chemical Carcinogens

A selected list of chemical carcinogens

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
…Cont inued)
A selected list of chemical carcinogens

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Oncogenic Viruses

A selected list of viruses causing human cancers

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Moecular Basis of Cancer


Certain genetic alterations in cells cause their
uncontrolled m ultiplication. Two types of regulatory
genes – oncogenes and antioncogenes have been
identified as crucial players in the development of
cancer.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Oncogenes


The genes that can cause cancer are known as
oncogenes. They were first identified in tum our-
causing viruses (Rous sarcoma virus). These viral
oncogenes were later found to be intim ately similar
to certain genes present in normal host cells which
are called protooncogenes. These are the genes that
norm ally encode for growth- regulating proteins in
the human body. The conversion of protooncogenes
to oncogenes is the crucial factor in the causation of
cancer.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

A selected list of oncoproteins, protooncogenes and associated human


cancers

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Activation of Protooncogenes to 26

Oncogenes

The conversion of protooncogenes to oncogenes


occurs by several mechanism s.
Promoter insertion

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

Enhancer insertion

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

Chromosomal translocation

Diagrammatic representation of reciprocal translocation in Burkitt's


lym phoma.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Growth Factors


Growth factors norm ally stimulate the proliferation
of cells. They regulate cell division by signal
transduction across the cell mem brane to the
interior portions of the cell including the nucleus. It
is widely accepted that growth factors play a key
role in carcinogenesis.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
A selected list of polypeptide growth factors and their
functions in human tissues

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Mechanism of Action

Mechanism of action of ras P21 prot ein


GRF = guanine nucleotide releasing factor; GAP = GTPase activat ing protein
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Anti- oncogenes


Genes other than oncogenes (opposing their effects)
have been found to play a major role at least in som e
types of cancers. They are also called tum our
suppressor genes since they are m ostly involved in
the regulation of cell proliferation.

An im portant m odel for understanding their role is
retinoblastoma which occurs in children.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
…Continued)


Loss of antioncogenes producing cancer has been
incrim inated also in various other types of cancers
which include Wilm 's tum our of kidney, small cell
carcinoma of lung, and a specific type of breast
cancer.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Diagrammatic representation of the role of m ultiple factors in 26

the development of cancer.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Tumour Markers

Tum our cells produce certain substances whose


detection in the blood indicates the presence of
tum our in the body.
These are called tum our m arkers.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26

Tumour markers and the cancers they are associated


with

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
26
Cancer Therapy

Chemotherapy is the use of certain drugs to treat


cancers.

Anticancer drugs regularly used in chemotheraphy

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4 th Edn) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Section VII
Molecular Biology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Chapter 2 7

DNA Metabolism

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Replication of DNA

Principles of Replication
1. Copying is accurate
2. Replication is semiconservative
3. Supercoils and DNA topoisom erases
4. Replication fork
5. Replication is sim ultaneous and bidirectional
6. DNA synthesis is catalysed by DNA polymerases

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Replication fork

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Replication in Prokaryotes


Most of the inform ation about the replication in
prokaryotes is obtained from the studies made on
the intestinal bacterium , E.coli.

The process of replication can be studied
conveniently in three stages.
1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Initiation

Helicase enzym es

Replication fork

Topoisomerases (also called as DNA gyrases)

Single- stranded DNA binding (SSB) proteins

Primer

Primase

DNA polymerase III

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Diagrammatic representation of the process of replication

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Elongation

Okazaki fragments

DNA polymerase I

Proof- reading ability

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Discovery of Okazaki fragm ents

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Termination

Terminus sequence

DNA polymerase II

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Replication in Eukaryotes

There are five distinct DNA polym erases identified in


eukaryotes. They are numbered by Greek alphabets.

1. DNA polymerase  synthesises primers for both


leading and lagging strands of DNA.

2. DNA polymerase  has sim ilar function as that of


DNA polymerase II of prokaryotes –DNA repair.

3. DNA polymerase  ex clusively replicates


mitochondrial DNA.
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

…Continued)

4. DNA polymerase  is analogous to that of DNA


polymerase III of prokaryotes. It takes part in the
synthesis of both leading and lagging strands with an
intrinsic proof- reading activity.

5. DNA polymerase  is com parable in its action to the


prokaryotic DNA polymerase I. It is involved in the
rem oval of RNA prim ers of Okazaki fragm ents on the
lagging strand. Occasionally, it replaces the DNA
polymerase d and performs its function.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

…Continued)

Like bacterial replication, replication in eukaryotic cells


can also be studied in three stages.

1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Initiation

Helicases

Topoisomerases

Replication protein A (RPA)

Replication fork

Multiple sites of origin of replication

Primers

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Overview of DNA replication on the lagging strand in eukaryotes
(leading strand is not shown)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Elongation

Replication factor C (REC)

Proliferating cell nuclear antigen (PCNA)

Sliding clamp

DNA polymerase 

Okazaki fragments

RNase H

FENI (flap endonuclease I)

DNA polymerase 

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Termination

Telomeres

Telomerases

RNA dependent DAN synthesis

Reverse transcriptase

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Inhibitors of Replication


The differences between the DNA replication in
bacteria and hum an cells give scope for developing
antibiotics that target bacterial replication but do not
affect hum an cells. Several drugs (e.g., ciproflox acin,
nalidix ic acid ) act by inhibiting the enzym es of
bacterial replication.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
…Continued)

Drugs targeting human replication enzym es such as


topoisom erases and telomerases arrest new DNA
synthesis and thus the cell division. For ex ample,
dox orubicin, adriam ycin, etoposide.

Certain nucleotide analogues such as 6-


m ercaptopurine and 5- fluorouracil inhibit human
DNA polym erases. They are also used as anti- cancer
drugs.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Cell Cycle

• S (Synthetic) phase
• M (m itotic) phase
• Gap1 (G1 ) and gap2 (G2 )
• Dormant phase (G0)
• Cyclins
• Cyclin- dependent kinases (CDKs)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Cancer and the cell cycle

Cell cycle in mammalian cells

S (synt hesis phase)


M (m it otic phase)
Gap1(G1 phase)
Gap2 (G2 phase)
Dorm ant phase (G0)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Apoptosis

Apoptosis
A programm ed cell suicide is referred to as apoptosis

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Recombination

The ex change of genetic inform ation between


various DNA segm ents is known as
recombination. Apart from rearranging genetic
inform ation, it also repairs dam aged DNA.
There are two types of recombinations.

1. Hom ologous recom bination: The ex change of


genetic inform ation takes place between
identical DNA sequences (parts of
chromosomes). The most com m on ex am ple is
recom bination between the m aternal and
paternal chrom osom es of a pair. (Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
…Continued)

2. Non- hom ologous recom bination: In this type,


the ex change of genetic inform ation occurs
randomly (need not be between identical
sequences). Genetic rearrangem ent usually
takes place by this process (transposition). It
also involves the ex perim ental installation of
foreign DNA into a host's chrom osom e.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Homologous Recombination

Diagrammatic representation of homologous recombination

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Three m odels have been proposed to ex plain


homologous recom bination.
i) Holliday m odel
ii) Meselson–Radding m odel
iii) Double- strand break model

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Holliday model of homologous recombination (the areas shown in 27

dotted box es are heterologous regions)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Non- homologous Recombination

Three types of non- hom ologous


recombination have been identified.
i) Transposition
ii) Site- specific recom bination
iii) Non- hom ologous end joining.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

A diagrammatic representation of retrotransposition

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
DNA Damage

The types of damage inflicted on the DNA


molecule by various physical and chem ical
agents (mutagens) are broadly classified into
four categories

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Types of DNA Damage

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Repair of DNA

Four m ajor repair system s are involved in


rectifying the DNA damage.
1. Mism atch repair
2. Base ex cision repair
3. Nucleotide ex cision repair
4. Double–strand break repair.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Mechanisms of DNA Repair

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Mismatch Repair


Even though replication occurs with high
fidelity, defects do occur during copying.
Mism atch repair corrects errors involving
single base pair or a sm all region of
unpaired DNA

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
A diagrammatic representation of mismatch repair

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Base Excision Repair

Diagram matic representation

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27
Nucleotide Excision Repair


Xeroderma pigmentosum
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
27

Double- strand Break Repair



Double- strand breaks are com mon during
im munoglobulin gene rearrangem ent which
are repaired forthwith. Otherwise, double-
strand breaks occur due to the free radicals,
radiation and chem otherapeutic agents.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Section VII
Molecular Biology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Chapter 2 8

RNA Metabolism

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

In 1958, Francis Crick formulated the m uch publicised


central dogm a of life where he proposed the flow of
biological inform ation

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28


Cells contain three major types of RNA:

ribosom al RNA (rRNA) is the chief constituent of
ribosom es;

messenger RNA (m RNA) carries the information
required for protein biosynthesis in its
nucleotide sequences;

transfer RNA (tRNA) delivers amino acids to the
ribosom es for protein biosynthesis of rRNA.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Principles of Transcription


Transcription is the synthesis of the RNA molecule
from DNA. Unlike replication where the entire
sequence of DNA is duplicated, during
transcription only certain segments of DNA are
ex pressed. These transcribable portions of the DNA
are referred to as genes.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)


Only one strand of the duplex DNA takes part at a
tim e in the synthesis of RNA.

The sequence of ribonucleotides in the newly
synthesised RNA m olecule is com plementary to the
sequence of deox yribonucleotides in this strand of
DNA m olecule and is called the tem plate strand.

The other DNA strand which does not take part in
transcription is referred to as the coding strand.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued


Transcription initiation site (TIS)

Downstream

Upstream

The figure shows that the genes occur on both strands of the
DNA and are always transcribed in the 3' to 5' direction (note
the direction of the arrows)

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

Diagrammatic representation of the process of transcription


(Note the unwinding of certain portions of DNA enabling the
transcription to occur freely).
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)


RNA polym erase (RNAP)

How does RNAP know where to start the process of
transcription in a stretch of DNA?

Promoters

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

Complementary base pairing in transcription

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Transcription in Prokaryotes

The transcription in prokaryotes is relatively sim ple


compared to that of eukaryotes. The enzyme RNA
polymerase (RNAP) catalyses the synthesis of all types
of RNAs in prokaryotes.
Transcription occurs in three stages:

1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

Initiation
The process of RNA synthesis in bacteria begins with
the binding of RNA polymerase (RNAP) m olecule on the
DNA.
RNAP recognises the transcription start site on the
tem plate strand of DNA with the help of certain
specific regions on the DNA known as prom oter
elem ents (PE).

Pribnow box (TATA box )

The ‘–35’ sequence

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

Prom oter regions in prokaryotes. Note that by convention the PE


regions are shown to occur on coding strand. However these regions
are functional only in an intact double- stranded DNA.
(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued

Elongation

The elongation of the RNA molecule occurs from the
5' to its 3' end, antiparallel to the template strand.
RNAP assembles ribonucleotides in a
complem entary sequence to the tem plate strand by
Watson- Crick base pairing rules

Termination
• Rho () factor
• Palindrom es

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Synthesis of RNA from DNA - the process of


transcription

TIS = Transcription
initiation site

RNAP = RNA polymerase

Sigma factor

Termination factor

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Transcription in Eukaryotes


Eukaryotic transcription is m ore complex com pared
to that of prokaryotes. There ex ist three distinct RNA
polymerases transcribing different types of RNAs
compared to the single RNAP in prokaryotes.


RNAP I catalyses the formation of large ribosom al
RNAs. RNAP II synthesises the prim ary transcript
form of m RNAs. RNAP III takes part in the synthesis
of tRNAs and small ribosomal RNAs.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

The transcription occurs in three stages.


1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

Initiation
Transcription begins with the RNAP recognising the
promoter site. Two types of sequence elements are
identified as eukaryotic promoters which occur
prox imal to the TIS.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

1. TATA box
This sequence is the Goldberg- Hogness box .
Determines where ex actly the transcription has to
begin along the template strand of DNA.

2 . CAAT box
This region determines how frequently the
transcription has to occur and at what speed .

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Cont inued)

Promoter regions in eukaryotes

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Pre- Initiation Complex (PIC)

The assembly of preinitiation complex (PIC)


or basal transcription complex (BTC)
[The scale (–30 t o + 30 ) shows the ex t ent of
BTC].

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Elongation

The RNAP II moves along the DNA template


incorporating ribonucleotides one by one as per the
Watson–Crick base pairing rules. The synthesis of
mRNA proceeds 5' to 3' end, in other words, the
tem plate strand of DNA is from the 3' to the 5' end.

• Enhancers and silencers


• Termination

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Post- Transcriptional Modifications


The mRNA in prokaryotes is fully functional as soon
as it is synthesised.

On the contrary, all types of eukaryotic RNA
produced by transcription as prim ary transcripts are
non- functional as such. They undergo ex tensive
structural alterations to produce the mature
functional molecules. The phenom ena of RNA
processing in eukaryotes are known as post-
transcriptional m odifications.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)

Messenger RNA
• Heterogeneous nuclear RNA (hnRNA)
• Mature mRNA
• The cap
• The tail
• Splicing
• m RNA editing

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued )

Splicing of mRNA from hnRNA

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

Inhibitors of Transcription


There are a number of drugs and tox ins capable of
inhibiting the process of transcription at various
stages, in bacteria.

Rifampicin, a drug used in the treatment of tuberculosis


and leprosy binds to the RNA polym erase and blocks
the bacterial transcription.

Actinomycin D, an antibiotic, binds to the tem plate


strand of DNA and obstructs the movement of RNAP,
thus blocking bacterial transcription.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

…Continued)


- Amanitin, a mushroom poison binds to the RNAP II
and inhibits the transcription in eukaryotes. Heparin,
a glycosaminoglycan binds to RNAP and inhibits the
transcription.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 28

RNA acting as enzyme


Reverse transcriptase
RNA degradation

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Section VII
Molecular Biology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Chapter 2 9

Protein Biosynthesis

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Genetic Code

The three nucleotide (triplet) base sequences in mRNA that


code for amino acids in protein are called codons or genetic
code.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
…Continued)

Genetic code with corresponding amino acids

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Features of Genetic Code


Universality

Specificity

Non-overlapping

Degeneracy

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Genetic Code

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Codon–Anticodon Pairing

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Wobble Hypothesis


A single tRNA can recognise more than one codon. This is
possible because the third base (3' base) in the codon
sometimes fails to recognise its complementary base in
the anticodon (5' base).

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Mutations

Classification of mutations
Mutations can be classified into two major categories.

1. Point mutations: It is defined as change in a single


nucleotide in DNA. These are subclassified as
i) Transitions: In this type, a purine is replaced by
another purine or a pyrimidine is substituted by another
pyrimidine.
ii) Transversions: In this case, a purine is replaced by a
pyrimidine or vice versa.

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued)

2. Frameshift mutations: Mutations of this type result


when one or more base pairs are either inserted in or
deleted from the DNA sequences. Hence, they are also
called insertion and deletion mutations.

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued

Different types of mutations

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued

Effects of point mutations



Silent mutation

Missense mutation
The mistaken (or missense) amino acid incorporated
into a protein may be acceptable, partially acceptable or
unacceptable

Nonsense mutation
Effects of frameshift mutations

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
Link between amino acids and CHAPTER 29

nucleic acids

The link between amino acids and nucleic acids is first made by
enzymes called aminoacyl tRNA synthetases.
Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Translation in Prokaryotes

Translation occurs in three stages


1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Initiation

Initiation of translation in bacteria (see textbook for abbreviations)

Figure
continued

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Elongation


Binding of an incoming aminoacyl-tRNA

Peptide bond formation

Translocation

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Elongation and termination of bacterial translation (see


textbook for abbreviations)

Figure
continues

(Figure continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued)

(Figure continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Termination


Stop codons UAA, UAG, UGA

Release factors (RF-1, RF-2, and RF-3)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Translation in Eukaryotes

Eukaryotic translation is more complex. As in prokaryotes, it


also occurs in three stages.

1. Initiation
2. Elongation
3. Termination

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Initiation

It occurs in three steps.


i) Dissociation of the ribosome
ii) Formation of the preinitiation complex
iii) Formation of the initiation complex

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Initiation of Translation in Eukaryotes
(see textbook for abbreviations)

(Figure continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

…Continued)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Elongation

It occurs in three steps.

1. Binding of aminoacyl-tRNA to the A site on the


ribosome
2. Peptide bond formation
3. Translocation

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Elongation and Termination in
Eukaryotic Translation
See textbook for
abbreviations.

A site, P site and


E site are shown
separately on the
left-hand side of
the diagram for
more clarity.

Note that there is


no E in
eukaryotes; it
exists only in
prokaryotes.
However, an E
site is shown in
this figure for
better
understanding.

(Figure continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

...Figure continued

(Figure continues…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

...Figure continued

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Termination


Stop codons (UAA, UAG, UGA)

Release factor (eRF)

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Protein Synthesis and Antibiotics

Inhibitors of protein synthesis



Streptomycin, neomycin

Gentamycin

Tetracyclins

Chloramphenicol

Erythromycin

Purmycin

Diphtheria toxin

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Post-translational Modifications


Trimming

Structural reorganisation

Modifications at the N-terminal and
C-terminal ends

Covalent modifications
Phosphorylation
Hydroxylation
Glycosylation

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29

Covalent Modifications of the Regulatory Enzymes of Major


Metabolic Pathways

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Protein Targeting


Signal sequence

Signal recognition particle (SRP)

Endoplasmic reticulum (ER)

Transport vesicles

SNARE proteins

Receptor-mediated endocytosis

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Protein destination by different pathways

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER 29
Some conformational diseases due to
mutations affecting protein targeting

Limited
Rafi MD: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30

Section VII
Molecular Biology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30

Chapter 3 0

Regulation of Gene
Expression

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Principles of Gene Regulation

• Induction and repression – enhancers and silencers

• Housekeeping and invisible genes

• One cistron–one subunit concept

• Genome organisation–size and gene num ber

• DNA organisation and gene ex pression


• Covalent modifications of histones control gene
ex pression

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
DNA- Protein Interactions

• Helix - turn- helix m otif


• Zinc finger motif
• Leucine zipper motif

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Diagrammatic representation of motifs mediating DNA–protein
interactions

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Regulation of gene expression in 30

prokaryotes

• LAC operon
• Structure of lac operon
• How does the lac operon operate?

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Lac operon

Diagrammatic representation of the modus operandi of the lac operon in E.coli

(Continues…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30

…Continued)

(CAP-cAMP = catabolite gene activator protein bound to cAMP; RNAP=RNA


polymerase)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Tryptophan Operon

Tryptophan operon in E.coli (for abbreviations, refer to the tex tbook)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Regulation of Gene Expression in 30

Eukaryotes

1. Chrom atin structure


2. Gene amplification
3. Gene rearrangem ent
4. Regulatory elem ents
5. Transcription
6. RNA processing
7. Alternate m RNA splicing
8. Transport of mRNA from nucleus to cytoplasm
9. Degradation of m RNA
10. Gene regulation at the level of translation

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Gene Amplification

A diagram matic representation of the am plification of


genes.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
30
Gene Rearrangement

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Section VIII
Biotechnology and
Immunology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Chapter 3 1

Recombinant DNA
Technology

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Recombinant DNA Technology 31

Protocol

1. Isolation of the desired gene


2. Isolation of vector
3. Formation of chim eric DNA
4. Uptake of chimeric DNA (Transfection)
5. Selection of cells containing chim eric DNA
6. Ex pression of the gene to produce the desired
product

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Basic mechanism of recombinant DNA technology

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Diagrammatic representation of selection of recombinant clones

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Tools of Recombinant DNA 31

Technology

• Enymes
• Vectors
• Hosts
• DNA to be cloned

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Enzymes

• Nucleases
• Ex onucleases
• Endonucleases
• Restriction endonucleases

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Restriction Endonucleases

• Nomeclature of RE
• Recognition sequences
• Restriction m ap
• Cleavage patterns

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Action of RE SmaI/ HpaI produces blunt ends

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Action of RE BmHI/ EcoRI produces sticky ends

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Some restriction enzymes with their sources, recognition
sequences and the products formed

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Enzymes commonly used in rDNA technology/ genetic engineering

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Vectors – The Cloning Vehicles

• Once the desired fragments of DNA are obtained,


they are inserted into a suitable vector to produce
indefinite num ber of copies of genes. This is
known as gene cloning. They are self- replicating in
an appropriate host cell.

• An ideal cloning vector should have the following


properties:

(Continues . . . )

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
(. . . Continued)

• It must have low molecular weight.


• It must have a unique cleavage site for the activity of
restriction enzym es at a single point.
• It must be able to replicate truly inside a host cell
after its introduction.
• It must contain genes which provide resistance to
antibiotics. This helps in the selection of
transformed cells from untransformed cells.

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Different cloning vectors with the corresponding hosts and
max imum sizes of foreign DNA inserts

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER

Vectors are of the following types


31

1) Plasmids
2) Bacteriophages
3) Cosmids
4) Artificial chromosome vectors
5) Ex pression vectors

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Cloning capacities of common cloning vectors

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Larger DNA fragments in cosmids and other vectors

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Hosts

• Prokaryotic hosts
• Eukaryotic hosts

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Some host cells used in genetic engineering

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Gene Cloning Strategies

• Cloning from genomic DNA or mRNA


• Methods of gene transfer
– Transform ation
– Conjugation
– Electroporation
– Liposom e- mediated gene transfer
– Direct transfer of DAN
• Gene libraries
• Screening m ethods

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Gene Banks


Gene banks are the outcome of novel concepts
where certain centres have been developed for the
storage of an individual's DNA for future use (e.g.,
in the diagnosis of diseases)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
Applications of rDNA Technology

Insulin
Technique for production
of recombinant insulin

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

• Hepatitis- B vaccine

• Growth hormone

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Ex pression of human growth hormone in bacteria

(Continued…

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

…Continues)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
DNA Vaccine

Mechanism of action of DNA vaccine in developing immunity

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31
DNA Finger Printing/ DNA Typing

Process of DNA typing


The process of DNA typing

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

• Interferons
• Antibiotics
• Recom binant factor VIII
• Tissue plasm inogen activator (tPA)
• Monoclonal antiboides
• Diagnosis of HIV infection
• Gene therapy
• Transgenic animals
• In agriculture

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Som e transgenic animals and their applications

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Bioreactor/ pharma anim als and their uses

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

Therapeutic human proteins produced by recombinant DNA technology

(Continues…)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

(. . .Continued)

(Continues…)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

(. . .Continued)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Selected list of diseases for which recombinant vaccines have 31

been or are being developed

(Continues . . .)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
31

(. . . Continued)

Limited
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
32

Section VIII
Biotechnology and
Immunology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
32

Chapter 3 2

Molecular Biology
Techniques

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Hydridisation

DNA–DNA
hybridisation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Probes

A probe is a single- stranded fragment of DNA, usually


labelled with a radioisotope, the nucleotide sequence
of which is complementary to the target DNA.

Application
DNA libraries contain thousands or even m illions of
irrelevant DNA fragm ents. It is difficult to pick out a
specific gene (a DNA sequence of interest) from these
fragments. Probes are used to search and locate a
specific gene from DNA libraries.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Identification of DNA sequences 32

using labelled probes

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Blotting Techniques

Blotting techniques are com m only used analytical tools for the
identification of desired DNA or RNA fragm ents.

Blotting is the process of im m obilisation of sam ple nucleic acids


on solid support.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Types of Blotting

The most comm only used blotting techniques are


listed below.
1. Southern blotting for DNA
2. Northern blotting for RNA
3. Western blotting for proteins
4. Dot blotting (DNA/ RNA)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Southern Blotting for Identification 32

of DNA Fragments

It is a technique to transfer DNA species separated by


agarose gel electrophoresis to a filter for analysis.

Applications of southern blotting


1. Mutant genes such as Hbs, cystic fibrosis,
Duchenne muscular dystrophy, phenylketonuria,
presence of viral DNA (hepatic virus B and C) can be
identified by this m ethod.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued)

2. It is used to detect minute quantities of DNA which


is mostly useful for forensic purposes (e.g.
determining paternity, identifying thieves and
rapists).
3. Useful for the determ ination of restriction fragment
length polym orphism (RFLP) associated with a
pathological condition.
4. It is used for the confirmation of DNA cloning
results.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued) Southern blotting technique

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Northern Blotting for RNA

Northern blotting is used for the specific identification


of RNA m olecules.

There will be RNA–DNA hybridisation. This is used to


detect the gene ex pression in a tissue.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Cont inued)

Applications

It is an ideal technique for determ ining the number
of genes (through mRNA) present on a given DNA.
But this is not practically applicable since each gene
may give rise to two or more RNA transcripts.

It is used to size and quantitate specific RNA
molecules.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued) Northern blotting technique

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Western Blotting for Proteins

Proteins are identified by this technique and are isolated


from the tissue and subjected to electrophoretic
separation.

Application
It is currently being used as one of the tests for
detecting the AIDS virus. In this case, the presence of
viral proteins in the blood is detected by antibodies. In
Western blot analysis, antibodies against different
components of the virus are analysed so it is considered
to be the confirm atory test for diagnosis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Dot Blotting for DNA/ RNA


It is a modification of the Southern and Northern
blotting techniques. In this technique, the nucleic
acids (DNA/ RNA) are directly spotted on to the filters
(not subjected to electrophoresis). The hybridisation
procedure is the sam e as that of the blotting
techniques.


It is useful in accum ulating data for the evaluation of
gene ex pression.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

Comparison of blot transfer techniques

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR)

PCR is basically a DNA amplification technique. It is an


in vitro procedure which generates large quantities of
DNA segm ents. Millions of identical copies of any DNA
sequence of interest can be produced by PCR.

Principle and technique of PCR


Step 1 – Denaturation
Step 2 – Renaturation (annealing)
Step 3 – Polymerisation (synthesis)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) – diagram matic
representation of the process
…Continued)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of PCR


Diagnosis

Cancer detection

Prenatal diagnosis

Medico- legal cases

Genetic disorders

PCR in DNA sequencing

Fossil studies

Com parative studies of genom es

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Hybridoma Technology


Production of monoclonal antibodies in vitro is called
hybridom a technology.


The hybridoma cells formed retain the properties of
both the parent cells, that is, antibody secretion
property of B- lymphocytes and uncontrolled division
property of cancer cell.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

A diagram depicting production of monoclonal antibodies

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of Monoclonal Antibodies

1. It is used in the quantitative preparation of the


specific type of cells used in the ELISA tests.

2. Is used in the quantitative preparation of pure


antigens.

3. It is helpful in the early detection of pregnancy and


in the treatm ent of cancers.

4. It is also used in the diagnosis of leprosy.

5. It is used in the enumeration of lymphocyte


subpopulations.
(Cont inues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued) Applications of Monoclonal Antibodies

6. It is used to suppress rejection reactions in organ


transplantation.

7. It can be used to institute of platelet clum ping in


patients who have undergone angioplasty and in the
treatm ent of autoim mune diseases.

8. It can be used to detect chlam ydia (a streptococcal


bacterium ), HIV causing AIDS and tox in and drug
levels in the body.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
DNA Sequencing

Techniques employed for DNA sequencing


1. Max am –Gilbert technique

2. Interrupted enzym atic cleavage method or the


dideox ynucleotide m ethod by Sanger

3. Automated DNA sequencing

4. DNA chips – micro arrays

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

Maxam and Gilbert method for DNA sequencing

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
DNA Markers in Disease Diagnosis

The DNA markers are used for genetic m apping


of the genome and for diagnostic purposes.

There are four types of DNA sequences which


can be used as m arkers.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued)

1. Restriction fragment length polym orphisms


(RFLPs)

2. Minisatellites (or) variable number tandem


repeats (VNTRs)

3. Microsatellites (or) simple tandem repeats


(STRs)

4. Single nucleotide polym orphisms (SNPs).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Restriction Fragment Length 32

Polymorphisms (RFLPS)

Methods of RFLP scoring


Two methods are comm only used for the detection of
RFLPs. They are

i) Southern hybridisation

ii) PCR

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

RFLPs by Southern hybridisation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of RFLPS

i) RFLPs in the diagnosis of diseases


ii) RFLPs can be used to detect hum an genetic
defects in prospective parents (or) fetal
tissue

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

RFLPs by polymerase chain reaction

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Variable Number Tandem 32

Repeats (VNTRS)

The pattern of VNTRs and RFLPs is used in DNA finger


printing, as the individual genome has many different
VNTRs and RFLPs which are unique to the individual.

Diagrammatic representation of VNTRs

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of VNTRs

• VNTRs are useful in detecting the genetic diseases


which are linked to changes in the degree of
repetition of microsatellites, e.g. Huntington's
chorea is a disease observed when the VNTRs
ex ceed 40 repeat units.

• When DNA molecules are subjected to restriction


endonuclease action, the VNTR sequences are
released, and they can be detected due to variability
in repeat sequence copies

• Microsatellites (simple tandem repeats)


• Single nucleotide polymorphisma (SNPs)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Mutation Detection Techniques

1. Single strand confirm ation polymorphism (SSCP)


2. Heteroduplex analysis

SSCP analysis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Conformation Sensitive Gel 32

Electrophoresis (CSGE)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Protein Truncation Test (PTT)

Protein truncation test (or) IVSPA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

• Denaturation high performance liquid


chromatagraphy (DHPLC)
• Ame’s test to detect mutagenicity

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Nanotechnology

Nanotechnology is a rapidly evolving new science


that deals with matter on a very small scale, just
bigger than atoms and m olecules.

It is used to understand the structure and dynam ics


of matter at dimensions between 1 nanometre (10 –9
m) and 100 nm .

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of
Nanotechnology

Drug delivery

Therapy

Cellular repair

Anti- microbial actions

Diagnostic medicine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
ELISA


Enzyme linked imm une sorbent assay (ELISA) is
based on the imm unochem ical principles of the
antigen–antibody reaction.


Types of ELISA


Antibody detection by ELISA (Indirect ELISA)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Indirect Elisa to detect antibody
…Continued)

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Antigen Detection by ELISA 32

(Sandwich ELISA)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
ELISA

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER

Radioimmunoassay
32

A known concentration of labelled


antigen with sat urat ed am ount of
specific antibodies is added to a
num ber of tubes cont aining serial
dilutions of the pat ient’s serum (only
one dilution is shown).

The unlabelled antigen (if present)


from t he serum displaces t he labelled
antigen at tached t o ant ibodies.

The com plex es are precipit at ed by


protein A or anti- IgG antibodies and
t he radioactivit y of t he supernat ant is
counted.

A standard graph is generat ed using


known concentrat ion of ant igens vs.
radioact ivit y.

Concentrat ion of ant igen in t he serum


of the pat ient is quantified wit h t he
help of the standard graph.
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
32
Radioimmunoassay (RIA)

As the nam e im plies, radioim munoassay is a


combination of the principles of radioactivity of isotopes
and the im munological reactions of antigen and
antibody.

Applications
Radioim munoassay is widely applied in the diagnosis of
cancers, hormonal disorders and also for therapeutic
m onitoring of drugs. It is an ex tensively used tool in
biomedical research.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued)

Haptens are the substances that make other substances


antigenic, which in turn, elicit specific antibody
responses. By this m ethod, the concentrations of several
compounds can be estimated by RIA, which include
steroid horm ones, peptides, nucleic acids, vitamins,
drugs including several antibiotics.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32
Applications of Radioactive Isotopes

1. The sequence of reactions and chemical changes in


the metabolic pathways is studied by using isotope
tracers. By labelling the substrates with these tracers
(e.g., 14 C and 15 N), it is possible to know the sequence
of reactions and m olecular changes from substrate to
end- product in a metabolic pathway, e.g., Krebs
cycle, glycolysis, urea cycle, fatty acid synthesis and
ox idation.
2. The rate of synthesis and degradation of a substance
in the body (turnover rate) is studied by using
radioisotope tracers.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
32

…Continued) Applications of Radioactive Isotopes

By this the biological half- lives of various substances


are studied (e.g., half- life of album in is 21 days).
3. Radioisotopes are used to measure the total quantity
of a particular substance in the body (e.g., amino acid
pool) and its m etabolic turnover.
4. Radioisotopes are used to study the nucleic acid
synthesis (32 P), endocrine studies (125 I) and carbon
dating to study the age of fossils (14 C).
5. Radioisotopes are widely used in drug research and
xenobiotic metabolism.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

Section VIII
Biotechnology and
Immunology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
33

Chapter 3 3

Biochemical Techniques

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Electrophoresis


Electrophoresis is the migration of charged
particles in an electric field.


Electrophoresis is widely used for the separation of
proteins in body fluids (mostly the plasma proteins
including immunoglobulins, lipoproteins,
hemoglobins, isoenzymes and nucleic acids).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Electrophoresis apparatus – basic components

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Types of Electrophoresis

• Zone electrophoresis
• Imm unoelectrophoresis
• Isoelectric focusing
• High voltage electrophoresis
• Capillary electrophoresis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

Diagram m atic representation of im m unoelectrophoresis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Chromatography

Chromatography is a popular analytical technique that


is used to separate a m ix ture of closely related
compounds.
Principle and technique

Chrom atography consists of two imm iscible phases,
a m obile phase and a stationary phase. In the
mobile phase, the sample mix ture of substances to
be separated are dissolved in a liquid or gas.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

…Continued)


In the stationary phase, there is a porous solid
medium through which the sample mix ture in the
moving solvent (m obile phase) percolates.

The physicochem ical interaction that occurs between


the m obile and stationary phases results in the
separation of the com pounds from the mix ture.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Types of Chromatography

HPLC – High
performance liquid
chromatography;

TLC – Thin layer


chromatography)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Paper (Partition) Chromatography

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Centrifugation

Ultracentrifugation is a process through which


particles of very low molecular weight are separated.
It is made possible by applying very high speeds.

Applications of ultracentrifugation include separation


of serum proteins, lipoproteins, living cells and
organelles, determination of m olecular weights,
checking the purity of colloids and so on.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Principles of Colorimetry

• Coloured solutions have the property of absorbing


certain wavelengths of light (monochromatic light)
and reflecting (transm itting) certain others. For
ex am ple, a solution of hem oglobin absorbs blue-
green light and reflects the red colour and thus the
solution appears red in colour.
• In colorimetry, filters are selected accordingly, so that
the absorption is max imum at the chosen
wavelength.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

…Continued)

• In colorimetry, only coloured com pounds, or those


compounds capable of forming coloured derivatives
by reacting with test reagents can be analysed. In
these estim ations, the colour is directly proportional
to the concentration of the substance in the sam ple.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

…Continued) Principles of Colorimetry

Electromagnetic spectrum

Components of a colorimeter

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33
Beer–Lambert Law

Beer’s law
The amount of transm itted light diminishes
ex ponentially with an increase in the concentration of
absorbing m aterial.

Lambert’s law
The amount of transm itted light decreases
ex ponentially with the increase in the thickness of the
medium.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

• Spectrophotom eter
• Flam e photometer
• Fluorimeter
• Auto Analyser
• Atomic absorption spectrophotom etry

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
33

Schematic diagram of atom ic absorption spectrophotom eter

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
34

Section VIII
Biotechnology and
Immunology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34

Chapter 3 4

Immunochemistry

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34

Immunology is the study of the defence mechanism s


ex erted by the body to recognise non- self or foreign
matter.

Types of immunity
Immune defences or imm unity of the body operates in
two different ways, which are interdependent to some
ex tent.
• Innate (or natural) imm unity
• Adaptive (or acquired) im munity

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34

Adaptive immunity is of two types.


1. Humoral im munity
2. Cell- mediated imm unity

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Organisation of the Immune System

Cells involved in the immune system


B-lymphocytes and T-lymphocytes

B-lymphocytes
B-lymphocytes specifically recognise each antigen and
produce antibodies (immunoglobulins) against each of them.
B-cells are involved in humoral immunity.

(Cont inues

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34

…Continued)

T-lymphocytes
T-lymphocytes identify viruses and microorganisms from the
antigens displayed on their surfaces. T-cells are involved in
cell-mediated immunity.
Cytokines
They regulate the host cell division (mitosis) and also
mediate communication between different cell types of the
immune system.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Innate Immunity

Innate immunity defends against foreign cells in general


without recognising their specific identities (non-specific
immunity). Mechanisms of innate immunity include defence at
the body surfaces, inflammation and through interferons.

• Defences at body surfaces


• Inflammation
• Major histocompatibility complex (MHC)
• Complement system
• Interferons

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Adaptive Immunity
Adaptive imm unity is m ost specific in its action and
ex erts a m ore effective immune response.
It responds to m acrom olecules (mainly proteins), but not
to small foreign molecules unless these are attached to
large ones. These foreign macrom olecules are called
antigens, and antibodies are produced in response to
them . Lymphocytes mediate the adaptive imm une
response.

Adaptive imm une system is of two types.

1. Hum oral immunity


2. 2. Cell- mediated immunity

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Acquired Immunodeficiency 34

Syndrome (AIDS)

Mode of transmission
1. Majority of cases (about 80%) are through sex ual
contact. Men indulging in homosex ual relationships
are particularly at high risk. Heterosex ual
intercourse presents a relatively lower risk.
2. Intravenous drug abuse (by the sharing of needles).
3. Unprotected blood transfusions.
4. Vertical transm ission (mother to infant during
pregnancy)

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Structure of HIV

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Immunology of AIDS

• Macrophages and monocytes carry the virus to


various organs, including the CNS.

• T- helper (CD4) count falls drastically (< 400/ cu.mm


of blood). This not only reduces their cytotox ic
activity, but also leads to reduced availability of all
the other imm unological effectors.

• Antibody response against a foreign antigen is


reduced. Lymphokines such as interferon,
interleukin- 2 are also lowered.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34

Auto- immune diseases with corresponding autoantibodies

• Auto- immune disorders


• Mechanism of auto- im munity
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Clonal selection theory

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Cells of the imm une system

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Hematopoiesis

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Important cytokines and their functions

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
Phases of adaptive immune
response

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
In vivo immune response

(…Cont inues
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
34
In vivo im m une response
. . . Continued)

DCs encounter the invading microbes at the site of infection.


The microbes or particulate/ soluble antigens of the microbes
are picked up by DCs. The DCs and free antigens are taken to
the T cell- rich area in the regional lymph nodes through the
afferent lymphatic vessel. The antigen- processed DCS and
resident macrophages are presented to T H cells in the contex t
of class II MHC molecules. T H cells proliferate, travel to the B
cell area and produce cytokines which induce proliferation and
differentiation of B cells (with the help of T H2 cells) and CD 8 -
positive T C cells (with the help of T H1 cells) to antibody-
producing plasma and CTLs respectively. The effector cells and
antibodies leave the lymph nodes through the efferent
lymphatic vessel and reach the site of infection.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
Auto- imm une diseases with corresponding
CHAPTER
34

auto- antibodies

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
35

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
35

Chapter 3 5

Hormone Action

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Classification of Hormones

Based on mechanism of action


This is the most widely used classification. Hormones
are broadly classified into two m ajor groups based on
the location of receptors and nature of the signal used
to m ediate the action of hormone.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Group I Hormones

These horm ones are m ostly lipophilic.

The receptors for these hormones are located inside


the cell (intracellular receptors). The hormone–receptor
complex enters the nucleus, binds to the DNA and
causes selective gene ex pression, e.g., steroids,
thyroids and so on.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Group II Hormones

These horm ones are m ostly hydrophilic.


Receptors for this group of hormones are located on
the cell surface (plasma membrane receptors).
Since the hormone cannot enter the cell, the hormone–
receptor complex stimulates the release of certain
m olecules known as second m essengers in the cell,
which ex ert the horm one's biochem ical function.
Here, the hormone itself is considered to be the first
m essenger.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Classification of hormones by their mechanism of
action

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Diagrammatic representation of mechanism of action of
Group I hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Promoter element (PE) and 35

hormone response element (HRE)

Hum an genes have two distinct regulatory regions.

1. Prom oter element (PE)


2. Horm one response element (HRE)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Diagrammatic representation of gene, promoter element (PE) and
hormone response element (HRE) in human genome

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Diagrammatic representation of coregulators 35
linking HRU to PIC

The interaction between HRU and PIC is highly complex .

HRU = Hormone response unit; PIC = Pre- initiation complex ; RNAP = RNA polymerase; TFIID = Transcription factor
IID; HRE = Hormone response element, HR complex = Hormone- receptor complex , AF= Accessory factors, DE =
DNA element, ?= Unknown DNA regulatory elements

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35

Different signal tranduction cascades function through coregulators (CBP/ P300)

Coregulators establish communication


between HRU and PIC, resulting in
integration of complex metabolic
responses.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Mechanism of action of group II hormones

The hormone response occurs in four stages.


i) Binding of horm one to receptor
ii) Activation of G- proteins
iii) Generation of second messengers
iv) Protein phosphorylation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35


G- Proteins

Generation of second messengers – cyclic amp

Cyclic GMP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Mechanism of action of group II hormones using cAMP 35
as second messenger

Horm one signal t ransducing t hrough HR com plex → G- prot eins → Adenylyl cyclase → cAMP
→ Prot ein kinase A → Prot ein phosphorylat ion, result ing in the ult im at e biochem ical response

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
Formation of cAMP from ATP and its inactivation to 5 AMP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Calcium and phosphatidyl inositols 35

as second messengers

• Inositol 1, 4, 5 trisphosphate (IP3)


• Diacylglycerot (DAG)
• Calcium and calmodulin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Formation of DAG and IP3 by the action of 35

phospholipase C

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35
The mechanism of action of group II hormones using DAG, IP3
and Ca 2 + as second messengers.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Kinase- phosphatase signal 35

transduction cascades


Several receptors have enzyme activity (intrinsic protein
kinase activity) that is activated by the binding of the
hormone to the receptor.
These kinases autophosphorylate the tyrosine residues,
triggering a cascade of phosphorylation–dephosphorylation
reactions involving several other protein kinases and
phosphatases inside the cell.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
35

…Continued)


Different signal transducing m olecules such as Jak,
STATs, Ras, MAP kinase SH2 domains are involved in
a com plex array of m olecular interactions in the
cytosol and inside the nucleus.


Horm ones such as insulin, growth hormone,
prolactin, erythropoietin, leptin and so on initiate
their action by activating intrinsic tyrosine kinase
activity.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
36

Chapter 3 6

Hypothalamic and Pituitary


Hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Hypothalamic Hormones

Hypothalamic hormones directly control the production


and release of the anterior pituitary horm ones. Hence,
they are more com monly known as hypothalamic
releasing factors.

• Corticotropin- releasing horm one (CRH)


• Thyrotropin- releasing horm one (TRH)
• Gonadotropin- releasing hormone (GnRH)
• Growth hormone- releasing hormone (GHRH)
• Growth hormone release- inhibiting hormone (GHRIH)
• Prolactin release- inhibiting hormone (PRIH)
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
36
Regulatory feedback loops between hypothalamus -
pituitary - peripheral endocrine glands

For abbreviations see t he t ex t book .


Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
36
Anterior Pituitary Hormones

The hormones produced by adenohypophysis can be


broadly classified into three groups, based on their
mode of synthesis and mechanism of action.

I. The growth hormone – prolactin group


II. The glycoprotein hormones
III. The pro- opiom elanocortin peptide fam ily

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
The growth hormone- prolactin group

• Growth hormone (GH)


• Mechanism of action and molecular dynamics

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Signal transduction pathways mediat ing the biochemical actions of 36

growth hormone at sub- cellular level

GHR = Growth hormone receptor


JAK = Janus activator kinase
IRS = Insulin receptor substrate
PI- K = Phosphatidyl inositol kinase
STATs = Signal transducers and
activators of transcription
MAPK = Mitogenic activator protein
kinase
PLC = Phospholipase C

DAG = Diacyl glycerol


PKC = Protein kinase C
GLUT = Glucose
transporter

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological 36

functions of GH

• Effects on growth
• Effects on protein metabolism
• Effects on carbohydrate m etabolism
• Effects on lipid m etabolism
• Effects on mineral m etabolism
• Effects on lactation

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Disorders of GH production

Deficiency of GH
• Dwarfism GH-deficient dwarfs
• Laron type dwarfs and pygmies

Excess of GH
• Gigantism in children and acromegaly in adults

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Prolactin

Prolactin or lactogenic hormone is primarily involved in the


initiation and maintenance of lactation

Diagnostic chemistry and pathophysiology:


Prolactin measurements are indicated to investigate
amenorrhea (cessation of menses), infertility and
galactorrhea (spontaneous, inappropriate lactation).

Tumours of prolactin secreting cells cause the problems


mentioned above. Overproduction of prolactin causes
gynecomastia (breast enlargement in men).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
The glycoprotein hormones

Horm ones secreted by the anterior pituitary that are


glycoprotein in nature are classified under this
category.
These horm ones, four in number, are structurally
sim ilar but have diverse functions.

1. Thyroid stimulating horm one (TSH)


2. Follicle stimulating horm one (FSH)
3. Luteinising hormone (LH)
4. Hum an chorionic gonadotropin (HCG)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
The pro- opiomelanocortin (POMC) peptide 36

family

1. ACTH
2. - lipotropin (- LPH)
3. - MSH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH)

• Biochemical role of ACTH


• Ex cess production of ACTH

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36

Derivation of hormones from POMC cleavage

See the tex tbook for abbreviations.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36


–lipotropin (–LPH)
Endorphins and enkephalins


Melanocyte- stimulating horm one (MSH)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Posterior pituitary hormones


Two hormones, nam ely ox ytocin and antidiuretic
hormone (ADH), are released from the posterior
pituitary gland (neurohypophysis).

These two horm ones are originally synthesised in the


hypothalamus and are carried with specific carrier
proteins to the posterior pituitary from where they
are released into circulation.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER

Structures of posterior pituitary horm ones


36

The amino acids that are different in ox ytocin and ADH are shown in red.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Oxytocin

Biochemical and physiological functions

• Oxytocin stimulates uterine contractions during parturition

• Oxytocin acts on the myoepithelial cells of the breast and


produces a squeezing effect on the ducts, enhancing milk
flow through the ducts to the nipples (milk ejection or milk
let-down response).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36
Antidiuretic hormone (ADH)

As is obvious from the name, ADH stim ulates the


kidneys to retain water.
It is also called vasopressin because it causes a
generalised vasoconstriction.
ADH is released in response either to a rise in plasma
osmololity or to a fall in ex tracellular fluid volume.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36

Biochemical and physiological functions of ADH

• ADH causes the kidney tubules to reabsorb water

• ADH induces a generalised vasoconstriction (hence the


name, vasopressin) that leads to a rise in blood pressure.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
36

Abnormalities of ADH production and action


Abnormalities of ADH production or action cause diabetes
insipidus, a condition characterised by the excretion of
high volumes of dilute urine (polyuria).


Nephrogenic diabetes insipidus

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
37

Chapter 3 7

Thyroid Hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37

The thyroid gland produces two m ajor horm ones,


nam ely, triiodothyronine (T3 ) and tetraiodothyronine or

thyrox ine (T4 ).

It also produces calcitonin, a hormone involved in the


regulation of calcium levels in the blood.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37

The structural formulae of thyroid


hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37
Biosynthesis of thyroid hormones

A protein nam ed thyroglobulin and the trace elem ent


iodine are essential for the synthesis of thyroid
hormones.

• Uptake and activation of iodide

• Thyroglobulin

• Organification

• Coupling

• Phagocytosis (Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37

…Continued

• Hydrolysis of thyroglobulin

• Deiodination and recycling of iodine

• Release of T3 and T4

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37

Biosynthesis and
release of T 3 and
T4 in the thyroid
gland

See the tex tbook


for the details of
steps 1 - 8

(Continued…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological 37

functions

• Stim ulation of basal metabolic rate (BMR)


• Effect on protein synthesis
Protein synthesis and cause positive
nitrogen balance
• Effect on carbohydrate m etabolism
Intestinal absorption of glucose
Glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis
• Effect on lipid m etabolism
Lipolysis and lipid turnover

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
37
Disorders of thyroid function

Goitre

Hyperthyroidism
• The m ost com mon cause of hyperthyroidism is
Grave's disease

Hypothyroidism
• Cretinism
• Myx oedema

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Laboratory diagnosis of 37

thyroid function

Reference values of thyroid hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
38

Chapter 3 8

Hormones of the
Adrenal Gland

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

The adrenal glands are two small organs (each weighing


about 10 g) located above the kidneys (hence also called
suprarenal glands).

They have two functionally distinct parts, of different


embryological origin – the outer cortex (with three zones)
and an inner medulla

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

Adrenal gland with cortex (three zones) and medulla

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
Hormones of the adrenal cortex

The adrenal cortex secretes three classes of steroid


hormones.

• Glucocorticoids
• Mineralocorticoids

• Sex steroid hormones

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
Synthesis of adrenocorticosteroids
Adrenal steroidogenesis (biosynthetic pathway of major steroids in
adrenal cortex )

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
Salient features of adrenal steroidogenesis

• Mineralocorticoid synthesis

• Glucocorticoid synthesis

• Androgen synthesis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological functions of 38

glucocorticoids

Cortisol, cortisone and corticosterone are the


important glucocorticoids.

1. Effects on carbohydrate metabolism :


Glucocorticoids increase the supply of amino acids for
gluconeogenesis. Cortisol also increases hepatic
glycogenesis

2. Effects on lipid metabolism: Glucocorticoids


promote the breakdown of triacylglycerols (Lipolysis)

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

…Cont inued

3 . Effects on protein and nucleic acid metabolism:


Glucocorticoids promote RNA synthesis and protein
synthesis

4 . Effects on body defence: They suppress the host


imm une response

5 . Other physiological effects: Maintain water–


electrolyte balance. Maintain normal blood pressure
and cardiac output.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


Biochemical and physiological
CHAPTER
38

functions of mineralocorticoids

Aldosterone is the most potent among mineralocorticoids.

Aldosterone acts on the distal renal tubule to promote Na +


reabsorption in exchange for urinary loss of H+, K+ and NH4+
ions.

Its effect on sodium makes it an important determinant of


ECF volume.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
Diseases of adrenal cortical function

Hypofunction of the adrenal cortex

Disorders resulting from adrenal insufficiency is known


as Addison's disease.

Addison's disease is characterised by hypoglycemia,


intolerance to stress, weight loss, anorex ia, low blood
pressure, severe weakness, low Na+ and high K+ levels
in plasm a, increased skin pigm entation and so on.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER

Hyperfunction of the adrenal cortex


38

Hyperfunction of the adrenal cortex resulting in


glucocorticoid ex cess is known as Cushing's
syndrome.

The condition is characterised by hyperglycemia,


muscle wasting causing negative nitrogen balance,
fatigue, ex cess deposition of fat in the trunk region
giving a typical 'buffalo hum p' appearance,
osteoporosis, hypokalemia and hypernatremia.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


Laboratory diagnosis of adrenocortical
CHAPTER
38

function

The androgens are ex creted in urine as


17- ketosteroids (5–17 mg/ day)

Synacthen test

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER

Horm ones of the adrenal m edulla


38

Adrenal m edulla is an ex tension of the sympathetic


nervous system.
It produces two important hormones:
- epinephrine (formerly known as adrenaline) and
- norepinephrine (form erly noradrenline).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
Synthesis of catecholamines

Synthesis of catecholamines from tyrosine

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
38

Mechanism of action
The catecholamines act through two classes of
receptors.

1.- adrenergic receptors

2. - adrenergic receptors

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological functions of 38

catecholamines

• Response to stress

Fight-or-flight response

• Effects on carbohydrate metabolisms

Hyperglycemic effect

• Effects on lipid metabolism

Lipolysis

• Other physiological functions

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


Abnormalities of catecholamine
CHAPTER
38

Production

Pheochromocytomas

The disease is manifested by signs and sym ptoms
characteristic of catecholam ine ex cess (e.g.,
hypertension, palpitations, severe headache,
ex cessive sweating).

The tum our cells produce more norepinephrine than
epinephrine.

The levels of vanillylmandelic acid (VMA) in urine
(normal < 8 mg/ day) are elevated in patients of
pheochromacytom a. This is m easured in clinical
chemistry laboratories.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
39

Chapter 3 9

Hormones of the
Gonads

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

The primary reproductive organs, the testes (in males)


and the ovaries (in females), collectively known as
gonads, perform two types of functions.

1. Gametogenesis (the production of gametes –


spermatozoa in males and ova in females)
2. Synthesis of sex hormones (gonadal steroids)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

Sex hormones are categorised into three groups.

• Androgens
• Estrogens
• Progestins

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39
Androgens

In the m ale, testosterone is the principal and the most


potent androgen.

Biosynthesis of androgens

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39
Biosynthesis of Androgens and Estrogens from
Cholesterol

For the enzymes of the initial steps of the pathway see Fig. 37.2

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39
…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological functions 39

of androgens

1. Development and m aintenance of the male


reproductive system .

2. Metabolic effects
3. Androgens along with FSH induce Sertoli cells to
produce a hormone called inhibin.
Inhibin plays a role in promoting sperm atogenesis and
testosterone production by stim ulating the secretion
of FSH through a negative feedback loop.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

…Continued)

4. Testosterone is required for the initiation and


maintenance of spermatogenesis through Sertoli
cells.

5. Testosterone induces differentiation of m ale


accessory reproductive organs and maintains their
function.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Abnormalities associated with 39

androgen defects

• Hypogonadism

• Testicular feminisation syndrome

• Castration

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biosynthesis of estrogens and 39

progesterones

 Ovaries produce estrone (E1 ), estradiol (E2 ) while


placenta synthesises E1 , E2 and estriol (E3 ).

Corpus luteum

Placenta

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological role 39

of estrogens

1. They stimulate the growth of the ovary and follicles.

2. Estrogens prepare the endom etrium for


progesterone actions by stimulating progesterone
receptors; increase myometrial contractions in the
uterus; stimulate secretion of cervical mucus.

3. Estrogens prom ote prolactin secretion but inhibit


prolactin's milk producing effect on the mamm ary
glands.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

…Continued )

4. Estrogens increase lipogenesis in adipose tissue and


cause a 'female pattern of fat distribution' (fat
deposition on the hips and breasts).

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Biochemical and physiological role of 39

progesterone

1. Progesterone converts the estrogen- prim ed


endometrium to an actively secreting tissue that will
allow the implantation of the blastocyst; it
stimulates the secretion of a thick, sticky cervical
m ucus. It has an overall effect of m aintaining the
pregnancy.

2. It decreases proliferation of the vaginal epithelium;


decreases m yometrial contractions and movem ents
of the fallopian tubes.

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39

…Continued )

3. Progesterone stim ulates breast growth, particularly


of glandular tissue; inhibits the milk- inducing
actions of prolactin.

4. It increases the body tem perature.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
39


Role of estrogens and progesterone in
maintaining the menstrual cycle


Role of estrogens and progesterone during
pregnancy
• Contraception
• Menopause

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Hormonal disorders of the female 39

reproductive system
• Prim ary hypogonadism
• Secondary hypogonadism
• Turner’s syndrome
• Polycystic ovary disease (PCOD) (Stein- Levinthal
syndrom e)
• Congenital adenal hyperplasia
• Precocious puberty
• Amenorrhea
• Dysm enorrhea (painful m enstruation)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40

Section IX
Biochemical Perspective of
Endocrinology

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
40

Chapter 4 0

Hormones of the
Pancreas and Diabetes
Mellitus

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40


The pancreas is unique in that it contains two
different organs within its structure; an ex ocrine
gland and an endocrine gland.


The ex ocrine part secretes enzymes that are used for
digestion.


The endocrine portion contains about 1–2 m illion of
the islets of pancreas containing different cell types
(, ,  and so on). They secrete different horm ones.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40

1. - cells secrete glucagon

2. - cells secrete insulin

3. - cells secrete somatostatin

4. F cell type secrete sm all am ounts of pancreatic


polypeptide

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Insulin

Biosynthesis of insulin
Proteolytic
processing of
proinsulin to
insulin

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Mechanism and Molecular Dynamics of Insulin 40

Action at the Cellular Level

Diagrammatic
representation
of signalling
pathways
downstream
from the insulin
receptor .

For
abbreviations,
see the
tex tbook .

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40

…Continued)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Metabolic Effects of Insulin

Insulin acts as an anabolic hormone in the body

1. Effect on carbohydrate metabolism


• Promotes glucose uptake
• Favours glucose utilisation
• Discourages glucose production
2. Effects on lipid metabolism
• Favours lipogenesis
• Decreases lipolysis
• Discourages ketone body formation
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40

…Continued)

3. Effects on protein metabolism


• Insulin stimulates translation process

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER

Glucagon 40

Metabolic effects of glucagon


The metabolic effects of glucagon are in general, opposite
to that of insulin.

1. Effects on carbohydrate metabolism


2. Effects on lipid metabolism
3. Effects on protein metabolism

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Diabetes Mellitus


It is a metabolic disorder resulting either from deficiency of
insulin or resistance to its action causing increased blood
glucose levels (hyperglycemia) which lead to several
systemic complications.


Diabetes mellitus is broadly classified into two categories
based on etiology rather than treatment.

1. Type I diabetes mellitus


2. Type II diabetes mellitus

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Type 1 Diabetes Mellitus

Based on treatment, it was formerly known as insulin-


dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM).

It is also called Juvenile-onset diabetes.

Type 1 DM is considered an autoimmune disease.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus

It is also called adult-onset diabetes.

It was formerly known as non-insulin dependent diabetes


mellitus-NIDDM.


Metabolic syndrome

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Metabolic Abnormalities in Diabetes

Diabetic ketoacidosis
• Diabetic ketoacidosis is characterised by hyperglycemia,
hyperketonemia and metabolic acidosis.
• Kussmaul’s respiration

• Sweet smell
• Hyperglycemia

• Ketosis

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
…Continued)

• Metabolic acidosis
• Severe dehydration
• Electrolyte loss
Hypersomolar nonketotic coma
Lactic acidosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Long- term Complications in Diabetes

These include
• Atherosclerosis
• Retinopathy
• Nephropathy
• Neuropathy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Laboratory Diagnosis and Monitoring of 40

Diabetes Mellitus

• Blood glucose estimation

Random blood sugar (RBS)

Fasting Blood Sugar (FBS)

Post Lunch or post- prandial

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Urine Testing for Glucose, Ketones 40

and Proteins

• Testing urine for glucose is com monly done in


medical wards by using glucose- specific dipsticks
based on Benedict's principle.
• Detection of ketone bodies in urine is done by
Rothera's test.
• Testing for urinary albumin is performed to assess
renal dam age.
• Microalbuminuria
• Blood lipids and other parameters

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Glucose Tolerance Test (GTT)

• Normal response
• Diabetes mellitus
• Impaired glucose tolerance (IGT)
• Renal glycosuria
• Alim entary glycosuria
• Gestational diabetes mellitus (GDM)

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40


Glycated hemoglobin
The concentratio of HbA1 c reflects the mean
blood glucose concentration of the preceding 8 –
1 0 weeks.

Fructosamine

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40

Reference values of
HbA1 c

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
40
Hypoglycemia

• Whipple’s triad

• Post- prandial hypoglycem ia

• Reactive hypoglycemia

• Fasting hypoglycem ia

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
41

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

Chapter 4 1

Extracellular Matrix

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Composition of extracellular matrix

The ECM is made up of three major classes of biom olecules:

1 .Structural proteins such as collagen, elastin and fibrillin


which constitutes the major chunk of the ground substance.

2. Specialized proteins such as fibronectin and laminin,


which form a mesh of fibres resulting in a porous structure.

3. Proteoglycans, consisting of long chains of repeating


structures of disaccharides (glycosaminoglycan– or GAG,
known earlier as mucopolysaccharides), attached to specific
proteins.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Functions of ECM

• It holds the cells together in the tissues and plays a role in


normal growth and development of the latter.

• The ground substance (ECM), a porous structure, provides a


pathway for the sim ple diffusion of blood gasses between
cells and blood capillaries.

• It serves as a medium for the supply of nutrients to


individual cells.

• It plays a role in the development of inflammation.

• It plays an important role in the ageing process reflected in


the age- related changes in ECM.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Biomedical significance of ECM

• Ex tracellular matrix is believed to be associated with the


spread of cancer. Recent research suggests that
alterations in the structures of glycoproteins and
proteoglycans on the surfaces of cancer cells result in
metastasis.

Metastasis is the phenomenon whereby cancer cells leave


their site of origin (e.g., the breast) and m igrate through
the blood stream to distant sites in the body (e.g., the
brain) and grow there in an uncontrolled m anner, causing
deleterious effects in advanced- stage cancer patients.

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued )

• Involvement of certain components of ECM is established


in two of the major connective tissue diseases –
rheumatoid arthritis (RA) and osteoarthritis (OA).

Arthritis is a term com monly used to describe inflam mation


of joints. There are different kinds arthritis other than the
above two types. Although RA and OA both affect joints,
they are very different from each other.

RA is an autoimmune disorder in which the body’s own


imm une system attacks the body’s joints, while OA is a
degenerative condition caused by age- related
mechanical wear and tear of joints.
(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued)

• Several diseases (such as osteogenesis imperfector and


various types of Ehlers–Danles syndrome) occur due to
genetic derailment of the synthesis of collagen.

• Genetic deficiencies of the lysosom al hydrolases involved


in the degradation of glycosaminoglycans (GAGs) cause
certain diseases called mucopolysaccharidoses, so called
on the basis of the older nam e for GAGs.

These disorders occur due to im paired degradation of GAGs


and hence their abnorm al accumulation in various tissues.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Functions of Collagen

1. Collagens that are present in all tissues and organs


play a m ajor role in determining size and shape of
the organs. It provides structural strength and
support to tissues.

2. As a major com ponent of ECM, it enables proper


alignment of cells and thus remodels organs and
tissues.

3. It also plays a role in the proliferation and


differentiation of cells into different tissues and
organs.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

Schematic of the structure of collagen and fibril

(X and Y represent am ino acids ot her t han glycine.)

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Types of collagen and their distribution

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

Diseases due to impaired collagen


synthesis

About 30 genes encode the collagen and eight enzymes


take part in its biosynthesis. Thus, it is not surprising
that several diseases occur due to mutations in
collagen genes or in the genes that encode the
enzymes involved in collagen synthesis (mostly
during post- translational modifications).

Some of the clinically significant genetic diseases are


described nex t.

(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued) Diseases due to impaired collagen synthesis

1 . Osteogenesis imperfecta (Brittle bone disease)

The condition is caused by m utations in the genes encoding type I


and II collagens.
The disease is characterised by increased fragility of bones that lead
to multiple fractures in infancy and childhood. The sclera
becomes extremely thin and appear blue owing to a deficiency
of collagen. Eight types (I- VIII) of this condition have been
recognised.
Am ong these, type II is very severe and infants with this condition do
not survive. In other types, there is replacement of glycine with
som e other am ino acid which affects the form ation of the triple
helix resulting in polypeptides assem bling into abnormal fibrils.
This leads to degradation of the m olecule and is known as
procollagen suicide. (Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
. . . Continued) 41

Diseases due to impaired collagen synthesis

2 . Ehlers–Danlos syndrome

This group of disorders are characterised by hyperextensiblility


of skin and hypermobility of the joints. (The contortionist
known as the rubber man of Gem ini Circus could twist his body
into am azing shapes owing to his being a victim of Ehlers–Danols
syndrom e.)

Other sym ptom s of this condition include vascular fragidity,


kyphoscoliosis, arthrochalasis and derm atosparax is. Type I, III and
V collagens are affected.

(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
. . . Continued) 41

Diseases due to impaired collagen synthesis

3 . Alport syndrome (Hereditary nephritis)

It is due to m utations affecting the synthesis of type IV collagen


found in the basem ent m em branes of the renal glom eruli, inner ear
and eye. The early sign is hem aturia (ex cretion of blood in urine)
followed by ocular lesions and hearing loss. The patient finally
develops end- stage renal disease.

4 . Epidermolysis bullosa

This condition which shows blisters and cracks in the skin following
sm all injuries is caused by m utations in the gene encoding type VII
collagen.

(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
. . . Continued) CHAPTER
41

Diseases due to impaired collagen synthesis

5 . Scurvy

Scurvy, caused by vitam in C deficiency, is not a genetic disorder.


Vitam in C, however, is essential for the hydrox ylation of proline
and lysine to form hydrox yproline and hydrox ylysin respectively,
which are integral to the structure of collagen. In vitam in C
deficiency (scurvy), collagen synthesis is adverse affected,
resulting in defective connective tissue.

This results in capillary fragility, which, in turn, leads to bleeding


under the skin. This is why patients of scurvy suffer from swollen
and bleeding gum s, subcutaneous haem orrhages and poor wound
healing capability.
(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
. . . Continued) 41

Diseases due to impaired collagen synthesis

6 . Lathyrism
Like scurvy, lathyrism is also not a genetic disorder but a condition
characterised by lack of strength in or inability to m ove lower lim bs
observed in people who consum e pulse lathyrus sativa or sweet pea
(kesari dal) regularly as a part of their diet. This pulse contains a
tox in called β - ox alyl am inoalanine (BOAA) which inhibits the
enzym e lysyl ox idase, which adversely affects the cross- linking of
lysine in the collagen structure.
The result is weakening and brittleness of bones.

7 . Menkes disease
Deficiency of copper results in defective cross- linking of collagen
and elastin by the copper- dependent enzym e lysyl ox idase.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Genetic Abnormalities of Elastin

Williams–Beuren syndrome: This is a m ultisystem disorder


characterised by heart defects and unusual facial features. It occurs
due to deletion of elastin gene resulting in defective connective
tissue which also affects the central nervous system . Supravalvular
aortic stenosis occurs due to defective elastin synthesis,
ham pering blood flow.

Scleroderma: This is a skin disorder associated with accum ulation


of elastin in the skin.

Pulmonary emphysema: Decreased elastin synthesis results in


pulm onary em physem a.

Aging of skin: Fragm entation or decreased elastin form ation results


in cutis laxa and prem ature aging of skin.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Marfan Syndrome
Mutations in the gene for fibrillin cause Marfan syndrome.

It is inherited as an autosomal dominant trait characterised by


hyperextensibility of joints.

Patients of this syndrome show disproportional skeletal growth.

They are tall and have large body frames; even the digits of their
hand are extra-long.

They also exhibit cardiovascular signs such as weakness of the aorta


leading to dilation of the ascending aorta (aortic aneurism), and
dislocation of eye lens (ectopia lentis).

(It is conjectured that American President Abraham Lincoln could have


been a victim of Marfan syndrome.)

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Structure of Aggrecan

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Functions of glycosaminoglycans

1. GAGs, as part of proteoglycans, serve as the structural


components of extracellular matrix (ECM). They interact
with other components of ECM such as collagen, elastin,
fibrillin, fibronectin and laminin.

2. They play a role in cell- to- cell adhesion and facilitate


cell migration. Some of them serve as receptors in cell
membranes.

3. They contribute to the characteristic turgor of different


tissues.

4. They are responsible for the porous structure of ground


substance and serve as molecular sieves in the ECM.
(Cont inues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
. . . Cont inued) 41

Functions of
glycosaminoglycans
6. They are the components of synaptic vesicles.

7. As a component of glom erular mem brane, they play a role


in glomerular filtration.

8. They play a role in maintaining corneal transparency.


They are responsible for maintaining the structural
integrity of sclera of the eyes.

9. They serve as anticoagulant and prevent intravascular


clotting.

10. They facilitate fertilization by clearing the gel around


ovum and also play a role in morphogenesis in embryos.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Heteropolysaccharides

Glycosaminoglycans (GAGs)

GAGs, also known as mucopolysaccharides, are made


up of repeating units of disaccharides containing amino
sugars (glucosamine or galactosam ine) and uronic
acids (glucuronic or iduronic acids).

Amino sugars are further acetylated and sulphated.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
The major GAGs include:

1. Hyaluronic acid

2. Chondroitin sulphates

3. Keratan sulphates

4. Heparin and heparan sulphate

5. Dermatan sulphate

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

Structures of Glycosaminoglycans

Hyaluronic acid

Chondroitin 4- sulphate

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

…Continued) Structures of glycosaminoglycans

Keratan sulphate

Heparin

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . .Continued) Structures of glycosaminoglycans

Dermatan sulphate

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Important Mucopolysaccharidoses (MPS)

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Types of Glycoproteins

Glycoproteins are classified into three major classes.

O- linked glycoproteins
They are form ed by O-glycosidic linkage with the –OH of
serine or threonine.

Usually, the glycosidic linkage is between N- acetyl


galactosam ine and serine or threonine. Mucins belong to
this group.

They are distributed on the surfaces of epithelial cells of the


respiratory, gastrointestinal and genito- urinary tracts.

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
. ...Continued) 41

Types of glycoproteins

N- linked glycoproteins

The linkage is between the N of the amide group of


asparagine and N- acetyl glucosam ine.

The glycosylation occurs in the endoplasmic reticulum


and the Golgi complex .

Plasma proteins belong to this group.

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. ...Continued) Types of glycoproteins

GPI- linked glycoproteins

This group of glycoproteins are anchored to the


plasm a mem brane by GPI (glycosyl phasphatidyl
inositol).

They are called sticky foot structures.

Ex amples include enzyme acetyl cholinesterase


anchored on the RBC membrane and alkaline
phosphatase on the intestine and placental structures.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41
Disorders associated with glycoproteins

Congenital glycosylation disorders are a group of


autosomal recessive disorders resulting from mutation
in the genes encoding the enzymes required for the
synthesis of N- linked glycoprotein or the processing of
N- glycan chain.

Som e of these disorders are given nex t.

(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued)

Paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria

Parox ysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria (PNH) is


characterised by anaem ia and the presence of
hemoglobin in urine due to RBC hem olysis.

This is due to a defect in the genes of the enzymes


required for attaching alucosamine to
phosphatidylinositol in GPI- linked glycoproteins,
leading to defective attachment of the protein to the
RBC membrane.

RBCs are hence easily hemolysed.


(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued)

I- cell disease or inclusion cell disease


I- cell disease is a m ulti- system ic disease involving CNS, leading to
psychological and m otor abnorm alities with m ental retardation.
Patients do not usually live beyond their first decade of life.
The lack of lysosm al enzym es in cells causes the accum ulation of
m any different types of undergraded m olecules in the lysosom es,
which results in the form ation of inclusion bodies.
A defect in the targeting of the glycoprotein enzym e hydrolase is
also present, which results in the enzym e protein not reaching its
destination, i.e., the lysosom es, but getting secreted instead in the
plasm a.

(Continues . . .

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
41

. . . Continued)

Mannosidosis and related disorders

Degradation of glycoproteins requires many enzymes


such as neuram inidases, galactosidase, mannosidases,
and fucosides.

Mannosidosis is caused by the specific deficiency of α-


m annosidase.

Most diseases have CNS involvement leading to mental


retardation and enlargement of liver, spleen, etc. These
are autosom al recessive disorders which vary from m ild to
severe form.

At present, there is no definite treatm ent for them.


©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42

Chapter 4 2

Reactive Oxygen Species


and Antioxidants

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42

The products of partial reduction of molecular ox ygen


which are unstable and highly reactive can dam age
the tissues. These potentially dangerous molecules
are called reactive ox ygen species (ROS).

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42

Types of reactive oxygen species (ROS)

1. Most of the ROS are free radicals in nature.

A free radical is a m olecule or molecular species


capable of independent ex istence that contains one
or more unpaired electrons (shown as a ‘dot’) in its
outer orbital, e.g., the hydrox yl radical . (Note
that it is different from the hydrox yl ion OH –),
hydroperox yl radical , lipid perox ide radical
, , nitric ox ide (NO) and so on.

2. Certain ions e.g. hypochlorite ion (CIO–).


(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
…Cont inued)

3. A combined form of free radical and ion , e.g.,


superox ide anion

4. Certain highly reactive m olecules (which do not


contain an unpaired electron), e.g., hydrogen
perox ide (H2 O2 ), singlet ox ygen (1 O2 ).

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Sources and generation of ROS

1 . Respiratory chain
About 2% of inhaled ox ygen undergoes partial
reduction liberating superox ide anion and perox ide
radical which are potentially destructive.

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42

…Cont inued)

2 . Respiratory burst
Macrophages and neutrophils engulf bacteria, utilising
large amounts of ox ygen in the process. This
phenomenon is called respiratory burst. As a result of
this phagocytic activity, about 10% of the consumed O 2
is diverted to the generation of ROS such as superox .ide
. and hypochlorite ion
(O2 –), H2 O2 , hydrox yl radical (OH)
(CIO–).
Interestingly, the generated ROS ex erts a potent
bactericidal action (killing the bacteria).

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
…Cont inued)

3 . Lipid peroxidation
Initiation phase

Propagation phase

Termination phase

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Other sources of ROS

• Superox ide anion and H2 O2


• During - ox idation in perox isomes
• In WBC and platelets, the enzyme lipo- ox ygenase
• Haber- Weiss reaction
• During drug metabolism
• Ionising radiation (e.g. UV radiation, - rays)
• Tobacco sm oking
• Reperfusion- induced injury

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Mechanism of action of ROS

• Effect of ROS on lipids


• Effect on proteins and carbohydrates
• Effect on DNA

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
ROS and disease

• Ageing
• Cardiovascular disease
• Cancer
• Inflam matory diseases
• Respiratory diseases
• Diabetes
• Infertility
• Beneficial effects of ROS

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Protection against ROS – 42

the role of antioxidants

• Preventive antiox idants

• Chain breaking antiox idants

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Antioxidant Enzymes

• Superox ide dism utase (SOD)

• Catalase

• Glutathione perox idase and reductase

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Antioxidant Vitamins

• Vitamin E

• Vitamin C

• - Carotene

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Other Antioxidants

• Selenium

• Glutathione

• Uric acid

• Bilirubin

• Ceruloplasmin, transferrin and haptoglobin

• Lipoic acid

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
Antioxidant Foods


Unprocessed vegetable oils (like soyabean oil, rice
bran oil, cotton seed oil, sunflower oil), whole grains,
green leafy vegetables, legum es, fruits (like citrus
fruits, guava, am la), green vegetables (like spinach,
cabbage, cauliflower), carrots, papaya, waterm elon,
tom atoes have a high content of various antiox idants.

(Continues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
42
…Cont inued)


Grapeseed, turm eric, walnuts, onions, beverages
such as green tea, red wine and organ meats contain
different polyphenols, catechins, curcuminoids,
proanthocyanidins, phenolic acids have antiox idant
properties. Certain food additives such as
propylgallate, butylated hydrox yl anisole, butylated
hydrox yl toulene are used to prevent lipid
perox idation in packed foods.

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

Chapter 4 3

Biochemical Genetics

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

Development of genetics – Mendel’s principles


Heredity – make- up in humans

Alleles

Diploid

Haploid

Aneuploid

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
Genetic diseases and modes of 43

inheritance

Genetic diseases can be categorised into three


groups.
1. Chromosomal
2. Gene disorders
3. Multifactorial disorders

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

Monogenic traits occur in different patterns, depending


on whether the m utant gene is dom inant or recessive
and whether it is on an autosom e or a sex chromosome.

1. Autosomal dom inant


2. Autosomal recessive
3. Sex or X–linked dom inant
4. Sex or X–linked recessive

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

• Inborn errors of m etabolism


• Genetics in cancer
• Prenatal diagnosis
• Eugenics

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
43

Differences between monozygotic and dizygotic twins

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44

Chapter 4 4

Environmental Pollutants,
Toxins and Biomedical
Waste Management

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Types of Pollution

Pollution can be broadly categorised into the


following types.
1. Air pollution
2. Water pollution
3. Soil pollution
4. Noise pollution
5. Thermal pollution
6. Nuclear pollution

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Properties and Classification of Pollutants

Classification based on type of damage

1. Physical pollutants

2. Chem ical pollutants

3. Biological pollutants

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Classification based degradability

1. Biodegradable pollutants

2. Slowly degradable pollutants

3. Non- biodegradable pollutants

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Air Pollution

• Sulphur diox ide


• Nitrogen ox ides
• Ozone
• Am monia
• Carbon monox ide
• Carbon diox ide
• Volatile organic com pounds
• Persistent organic pollutants
• Airborne particles

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Water Pollution

• Effects of water pollution

• Measures to prevent water pollution

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44

• Soil pollution

• Noise pollution

• Therm al pollution

• Nuclear pollution

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Toxins and Poisons

• Lead

• Mercury

• Aluminium

• Cadm ium and arsenic

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
Toxins in Foods

• Enzyme inhibitors

• Neurotox ins and m ycotox ins

• Goitrogens

• Biogenic am ines

• Anti- vitam ins

Pesticides

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44
• Biochemical Waste Management

Colour- coded bags for biomedical waste segregation as per 2016 rules

Cont inues…

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
44

… Continued

Colour- coded bags for biomedical waste segregation as per 2016 rules

©
Limited
Universities
Rafi Press (India) of
M D: Textbook Private Limited
Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
45

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
45

Chapter 4 5

Human Genome Project and


Bioinformatics

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
What is the Human Genome Project?

The human genom e project (HGP) is an international


scientific research project with the goal of
determ ining the complete sequence of nucleotides
of the human DNA, and of indentifying and mapping
all the genes of the hum an genome.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
The specific goals of HGP

• Estim ating the total number of genes; identifying and


locating the positions of all these genes in the hum an
genom e.

• Understanding the dynam ics of gene ex pression


which will improve our ability to provide better
diagnosis, treatm ent and prevention of diseases.

• Determ ining the sequences of the three billion


nucleotides in the DNA, storing this inform ation in
databases and developing tools for data analysis.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Mapping and sequencing of the 45

human genome

• Mapping protocols
– Probes
– Hierarchical shotgun approach
– RFLP
– VNTR
– Cytogenetic maps
– FISH

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

…Continued)

• Sequencing protocols
– Cloning
– rDNA technology
– PCR
– Gel electrophoresis
– Max am - Gilbert m ultiplex technique
– Sanger sequencing
– Chromosome walking
– Chromosome jumping

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
Results of HGP

– Number of genes
– Orphan genes
– Non- coding RNAs
– Junk DNA
– Sizes of genes
– Genes associated with diseases
– Single nucleotide polym orphisms
– Satellite DNAs

(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
…Continued)

– Short tandem repeats (STRs)

LINEs

SINEs (ALU family)

LTRs

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

Various Elements in the Human Genome

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
Applications and proposed benefits of 45

HGP

Applications in medicine
The hum an genome project, through its sequencing of
the DNA, helps in understanding the root causes of
diseases, enabling us to develop effective treatment
strategies.

• Applications in biotechnology
• Agriculture
• Environm ental cleanup
• ELSI of HGP

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
Bioinformatics

Bioinform atics is the combination of biology, com puter


science and inform ation technology.

Scope of bioinformatics
• DNA sequencing data
• Gene ex pressions profiles
• RNA and protein sequences
• Protein 3- D structure analysis
• Microarrays (DNA chips)
• Data from patients’ clinical trials
• Drug designing

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45
Biological Databases

• Primary databases
• Secondary databases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

• Nucleotide sequence databases


• Protein sequence databases
• Macrom olecular structure databases
• Other databases

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


Some Popular Database Website
CHAPTER
45

Addresses

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

Applications of Bioinformatics
• Bioinform atics can be applied to the identification of
nucleotide sequences of protein- encoding genes. Since
amino acid sequencing is a tedious task, the base
sequence of the gene for a given protein can be
translated into an am ino acid sequence using the genetic
code.

However, this is easier said than done because eukaryotic


genes are interrupted by introns, making it difficult to
deduce the ex act location of the gene sequence that codes
for a particular protein.
The ends of introns, however, have specific base sequences
that help in locating the ex act positions of genes.
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

…Continued)
Applications of Bioinformatics

• Specific locations in the DNA can be identified and cut by


restriction enzym es.

• By making a comparative study of the genomes of various


organism s, the evolutionary relationships
• between genes can be elucidated.

• The 3- D structure of proteins can be predicted and the


highly conserved sequences (which represent the
• functional domain portions) can be traced.

• Using the inform ation in databases, it is possible to


develop drugs to treat a disease or a diagnostic test to
detect diseases at an early stage.
(Continues…

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
45

Applications of Bioinformatics
…Continued)

• Bioinformatics can be used in clinical trials and for


studying the complex m etabolic pathways in cells.

• In agriculture, it can be used to implant disease- and


insect- resistant crops to increase crop yields and to
monitor the nutritional content of plants that serve as
food. The cum ulative genetic health of a breeding pool
and livestock can be improved.

• Molecular modelling of biomolecules can be attem pted


using the available database.

• The complete DNA sequences or the genomes of


endangered species can be preserved (recall the
• recreation of dinosaurs in the movie, Jurassic Park).
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
46

Section X
Contemporary Topics

Universities Press
3-6-747/1/A & 3-6-754/1, Himayatnagar
Hyderabad 500 029 (A.P.), India
Phone: 040-2766 5446/5447
Email: info@universitiespress.com
marketing@universitiespress.com
Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press
CHAPTER
46

Chapter 4 6

Gene Therapy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46

Gene therapy involves correcting defective genes. Gene


therapy involves isolating normal genes and inserting
them into diseased cells, so that the norm al genes are
ex pressed, allowing the diseased cells to return to a
normal state.

Gene delivery protocols

• Ex - vivo gene transfer

• In- vivo gene transfer

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
Gene Transfer Techniques

Viral vectors
• Retroviruses
• Adenoviruses
• Herpes viruses
Transfer through liposomes
Receptor- mediated endocytosis
Artificial chromosome vectors
Antisense therapy
Target tissues for gene transfer

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
Some of the diseases treated by gene therapy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
Use of retrovirus for gene therapy

The retrovirus carries an RNA copy of the therapeutic gene into the cell. The endosome containing virus
dissolves and the viral RNA and reverse transcriptase are released into the cell. The enzyme copies the RNA into
a double- stranded DNA that eventually integrates into the host DNA. Transcription and translation of this DNA
(the therapeutic gene) produces the therapeutic protein. Note that the virus does not multiply since its genes
were removed and replaced by the RNA copy of the therapeutic gene.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
Diseases treated with gene therapy


A defect in the adenosine deaminase (ADA) gene
located on chrom osom e 20 causes severe com bined
im munodeficiency syndrom e (SCID).


Familial hypercholesterolem ia


Cystic fibrosis

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46

• Gene therapy in cancer

• Antisense therapy

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
The process of RNA
interference

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46

RNA interference, a natural mechanism evolved


against the invasion of RNA viruses,
is also used to block the ex pression of oncogenes.

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press


CHAPTER
46
Future scope of gene therapy

The advent of gene therapy in the past few decades


offers the promise of many revolutionary changes in
clinical medicine.

• Curing genetic disorders perm anently


• Correcting cancer genes and inducing cancerous cells
to m ake tox ins so that they kill themselves
• Blocking viral genes (e.g., HIV)
• Creating stem cells from som atic cells

Rafi M D: Textbook of Biochemistry (4th Edition) Universities Press

You might also like